Seiko Fb 900 Users Manual

FB-900 to the manual 69493b9c-e7c3-4bf0-bc89-f58a2a150082

2015-02-03

: Seiko Seiko-Fb-900-Users-Manual-466948 seiko-fb-900-users-manual-466948 seiko pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1

24-pin Dot-matrix Printer

FB-900

OWNER'S MANUAL

1. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

2. This manual is subject to change without notice.

3. This manual was prepared with the greateset care. If you should find any unclear points,

mistakes, or omissions, please contact us.

4. We will not bear any responsibility for unsatisfactory results from the use of this printer

despite item 3 above.

* EPSON is a registered trademark of S.Epson Corporation.

* LQ-2550 is a registered trademark of S.Epson Corporation.

* IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

* IBM 2391 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

* HP is a registered trademark of HEWLETT-PACKARD Company.

* PCL is a registered trademark of HEWLETT-PACKARD Company.

* DeskJet 500 / RuggedWriter 480 are registered trademarks of HEWLETT-PACKARD

Company.

* Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright © 1999 SEIKO Precision Inc.

Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can raditae frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However there is no guaratee that interfernce will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television recption, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

— Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

— Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

— Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

— Consult the dealer ro an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

“It is necessary to use shielded interconnect cables to insure compliance with FCC Class

B limits for radio frequency emissions.”

Caution : Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

1. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.

2. This manual is subject to change without notice.

3. This manual was prepared with the greateset care. If you should find any unclear points,

mistakes, or omissions, please contact us.

4. We will not bear any responsibility for unsatisfactory results from the use of this printer

despite item 3 above.

* EPSON is a registered trademark of S.Epson Corporation.

* LQ-2550 is a registered trademark of S.Epson Corporation.

* IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

* IBM 2391 is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

* HP is a registered trademark of HEWLETT-PACKARD Company.

* PCL is a registered trademark of HEWLETT-PACKARD Company.

* DeskJet 500 / RuggedWriter 480 are registered trademarks of HEWLETT-PACKARD

Company.

* Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Copyright © 1996 SEIKO Precision Inc.

Warning

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital

device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This

equipment generates, uses, and can raditae frequency energy and, if not installed and

used in strict accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However there is no guaratee that interfernce will not occur in a

particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or

television recption, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

—Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna

—Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

—Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the

receiver is connected.

—Consult the dealer ro an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

“It is necessary to use shielded interconnect cables to insure compliance with FCC Class

B limits for radio frequency emissions.”

Caution: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.

OWNER'S MANUAL

1999 SEIKO Precision Inc.

C

24-pin Wide-Carriage

Dot Matrix Printer

FB-900

As an ENERGY STAR Partner, SEIKO Precision Inc. has determined that this product meets

the ENERGY STAR guidelines for energy efficiency.

- Outline of the International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program -

The International ENERGY STAR Office Equipment Program is an international program

that promotes energy saving through the use of computers and other office equipment. The

program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that effectively

reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors can participate

voluntarily. The targeted products are office equipment such as computers, displays, printers, facsimiles,

and copiers. Their standards and logos uniform among participating nations.

How to use this maunal

This manual describes the operation procedures for the 24-Pin Wide-Carriage Dot

Matrix Printer. Read through this manual before using the printer. Keep this

manual near the printer and refer to it whenever necessary.

Sections 1 and 2 describe the basic procedures, including unpacking, setup and

key operations. Install and setup the printer as described in these sections.

Section 3 and subsequent sections describe the functions and software commands

of the printer. Refer to these sections when necessary.

This manual is organized as shown below.

1. Setting up the printer

2. Control panel operations

3. Setup options

4. Functions

5. Bar code and enlarged character function

6. Troubleshooting

7. Interface specifications

8. Software commands

9. Software setup functions

10. Specifications

11. Character set table

Index

Software command list

Read this manual thoroughly to use the printer properly.

—How to use this manual—

Precautions for use

Organization of this manual

Symbols used in this manual

How to use this maunal

A caution symbol

Care should be taken in order to operate the

printer correctly.

This symbol indicates a note that is useful for

operation.

1.

2.

3.

These item numbers show the sequence of

operation. Perform the operations in the

order shown.

1. MULTIPART

2.HEAD ADJUSTMENT

Press the key.

Display on the LCD

To the next step

Display on the LCD before

the key is pressed

Display on the LCD after the key is pressed

The symbols used in this manual have the following meanings.

—How to use this manual—

CAUTION

!

Caution

This symbol indicates that personal injury

may occur if this caution warning is ignored.

Contents
Preface
How to use this manual
Cautions for use
Organization of this manual
Symbols used in this manual
●Major functions..................................... i
●Cautions................................................. iv
Safety Cautions............................
iv
Cautions in setting up..................
iv
Cautions in operation...................
iv
●Unpacking the printer......................... v
Unpacking the printer................. vi
● Dimensions........................................... vii
● Components and functions................ viii
Appearance of the printer...........
viii
Components and functions.........
ix
Operation panel explanation 1.. x
Operation panel explanation 2. xi
Options and consumables....... xii
Maintenance............................ xiii
1. Setting up the printer...................... 1-1
● Connecting the printer to
the power source.................. 1-1
● Installing the ribbon cassette........... 1-2
Installing the ribbon cassette..1-2
● Paper path............................................ 1-4
Path of fanfold paper................ 1-4
Path of cut sheet paper............ 1-5
● Selecting the paper path.................... 1-6
● Paper..................................................... 1-8
● Selecting the paper form..................1-10
● Loading fanfold paper
(Front tractor)
..........................1-12
(Rear tractor)............................ 1-16
● Loading cut sheet paper
(Manual paper feeding)............ 1-19
● Printing using the cut sheet feeder
(Optional).............................1-22
● Running the self-test.......................1-27
● Connecting the printer to
the computer...........................1-28
Parallel interface....................1-28
Serial interface.......................1-29
● Input data hexadecimal dump list...1-30
● Link between paper path (PATH) 
and paper form (MEMO)..........1-31
2. Control panel
operations......................... 2-1
● Control panel operations................... 2-1
Control panel............................ 2-1
Fuction keys............................. 2-1
LCD........................................... 2-5
3. Setup options.................................... 3-1
Outline of the 
setup modes..... ......3-1
Available function in the
setup modes........... 3-1
Entering the setup
modes.................... 3-1
● Operations on the setup mode...........3-2
Keys for setting......................... 3-2
Setting example in EXTENDED
SETUP MODE.... 3-3
● Setup mode summary (1).................. 3-4
● Setup mode summary (2).................. 3-5
● Factory default setting..................... 3-6
#01 Multipart............................................. 3-8
#02 Head adjustment............................... 3-9
#03 TOF adjustment.............................. 3-10
#04 Page length..................................... 3-11
#05 Paper width..................................... 3-12
#06 Top margin..................................... 3-13
#07 Bottom margin............................... 3-14
#08 Left margin..................................... 3-15
#09 Right margin................................... 3-16
#10 Character quality............................ 3-17
#11 Character font................................. 3-18
#12 Character pitch............................... 3-19
#13 Line feed pitch................................ 3-20
#14 Enlarging/Reducing print.............. 3-21
#15 Paper Fastener................................ 3-22
#16 Perforation...................................... 3-22
#17 Fanfold feed.................................... 3-23
#18 Paper Quality.................................... 3-23
#19 Saving data in format memory...... 3-24
#20 Loading data from format
memory................................ 3-24
#20 Emulation........................................ 3-25
#21 Character table (HP)....................... 3-25
#22 Character table (EPSON)............... 3-26
#23 Character table (IBM).................... 3-26

#24 National font (EPSON).................. 3-27
#25 Code page...................................... 3-28
#26 Alternate graphics mode (AGM)
(IBM).................................. 3-28
#27 CR code function............................ 3-29
#28 LF code function............................ 3-29
#29 Accent character............................ 3-30
#30 Zero font style................................ 3-30
#31 Horizontal tab................................ 3-31
#32 Locking page length...................... 3-31
#33 Locking font................................... 3-32
#34 Locking character pitch................. 3-32
#35 Locking character quality.............. 3-33
#36 Locking character table.................. 3-33
#37 FF code function / TOF ................. 3-34
#38 Graphic Quality.............................. 3-35
#40 
Validity of bar code and
enlarged character
................ 3-36
#41 
Bar code type
................................... 3-37
Bar code specifications.........
3-38
#42 Bar code size................................... 3-39
#43 Enlarged character size.................. 3-39
#44 Software setup................................ 3-40
#50 PCL mode (HP).............................. 3-40
#51 Secondary character table (HP).... 3-41
#60 Setting option.................................. 3-41
#61 Paper path....................................... 3-42
#62 Automatic scrolling........................ 3-42
#63 Out-of-paper detection.................... 3-43
#64 Skew detection............................... 3-43
#65 Paper jam detection....................... 3-44
#66 Line feed speed.............................. 3-44
#67 Auto scroll position........................ 3-45
#70 Interface.......................................... 3-46
#71 Printer select command................... 3-47
#72 Parity bit (Serial I/F)................... 3-47
#73 Data length (Serial I/F)............... 3-48
#74 Stop bit (Serial I/F)...................... 3-48
#75 Protocol (Serial I/F)..................... 3-49
#76 Baud rate (Serial I/F)................... 3-49
#77 Serial error (Serial I/F)................ 3-50
#78 CTS signal (Serial I/F)................. 3-50
#79 CD signal (Serial I/F)................... 3-51
#80 DSR signal (Serial I/F)................. 3-51
#81 Input buffer size.............................. 3-52
#82 BUSY/ACK signal timing
(Parallel I/F)....................... 3-53
#83 Data latch timing
(Parallel I/F)....................... 3-53
#84 Error Status (Parallel I/F)............... 3-54
#90 Printing direction........................... 3-55
#91 Display language on LCD............. 3-55
#92 Locking panel keys........................ 3-56
#93 Locking reset key........................... 3-56
#94 Printing panel setting..................... 3-57
#95 Printing setup list........................... 3-57
4. Functions........................................ 4-1
● High speed printing............................. 4-1
● Enhancing the copying capability
for multipart forms................. 4-2
● Setting the printing start position........ 4-2
● Feeding perforation to the cutter
position................................... 4-3
● More stable paper feeding.................. 4-3
● Automatically feeding perforation to the paper 
cutter position in the standby condition.. 4-4
● EEPROM initialization ...................... 4-5
● Correcting vertical misalignment........ 4-6
● Using various types of paper............... 4-8
● Executing test printing......................... 4-9
● Key shortcut function........................... 4-9
● Setting the application software......... 4-10
● Connecting the printer in the
HP envioronment................. 4-12
5. Bar code and enlarged
character function................. 5-1
● Bar code type.......................................5-1
Outline of bar code function........ 5-1
Makeup of bar code....................... 5-1
Presettable bar code function list.5-2
Bar code command list................. 5-2
(1) Bar code type.......................................... 5-2
(2) Element width........................................ 5-3
(3) Bar code height..................................... 5-3
(4) Setting HRI on and off........................... 5-3
(5) HRI font.................................................. 5-4
(6) Check character.................................... 5-4
Contents

(7) Starting the bar code data sequence.... 5-4
(8) Ending the bar code data sequence.... 5-5
(9) Bar code data sequence......................... 5-5
(10) Printing density.................................... 5-5
(11) Guide bar expansion............................ 5-5
(12) Start and stop characters..................... 5-6
(13) Barcode rotational angle...................... 5-6
(14) Disabling HRI of the start 
and stop characters................... 5-6
(15) Value input mode.................................. 5-6
(16) Initializing the bar code mode.............. 5-7
Additional explanation of bar code
commands................................. 5-7
◆
Data processing in the bar
code data sequence................... 5-7
◆
Printing bar codes..................................... 5-8
◆
HRI........................................................... 5-9
◆
Error processing...................................... 5-10
◆
Code 128 subset transition rule............. 5-11
◆
UPC-E conversion rule......................... 5-12
◆
Calculating the check character............ 5-12
◆
Other....................................................... 5-14
◆
Element printing.................................... 5-14
● Enlarged character function........... 5-16
Outline of enlarged character
function................................... 5-16
Enlarged character command list.. 5-16
(1) Executing backspacing......................... 5-17
(2) Executing line feeding.......................... 5-17
(3) Executing form feeding........................ 5-18
(4) Executing carriage return..................... 5-18
(5) Initializing the 
enlarged character mode........ 5-18
(6) Arrangement of enlarged characters..... 5-19
(7) Cell magnification for enlarged
characters............................... 5-19
(8) All-character set for enlarged 
characters................................ 5-20
(9) Selecting an enlarged character font..... 5-20
(10) Height expansion for enlarged
characters................................ 5-21
(11) HMI for enlarged characters............... 5-21
(12) VMI for enlarged characters............... 5-22
(13) Setting and canceling the enlarged
character mode...................... 5-22
(14) Enlarged character cell offset............ 5-23
(15) Enlarged character pitch.................... 5-23
(16) Enlarged character quality.................... 5-24
(17) Enlarged character rotational angle..... 5-24
(18) Setting and canceling enlarged
character smoothing................. 5-25
(19) Enlarged character top offset............... 5-25
(20) Setting and canceling underlining
of enlarged characters.............. 5-26
(21) Enlarged character widthwise 
expansition................................5-26
(22) Horizontal printing position for
enlarged characters.................. 5-27
(23) Vertical printing position for
enlarged characters.................. 5-27
◆
Enlarged character print samples.......... 5-28
6. Troubleshooting............................. 6-1
● Functional error messages................ 6-1
● Operational error messages.............. 6-2
● Troubleshooting................................. 6-6
7. Interface specifications............... 7-1
● Parallel interface................................. 7-1
Input connector......................... 7-1
Pin configuration...................... 7-1
Timing chart.............................. 7-2
Input/output conditions............. 7-2
Signal explanations................... 7-3
Input signals to the printer........ 7-3
Output signals from the printer...7-4
● Serial interface.................................... 7-5
Input connector........................ 7-5
Pin configuration...................... 7-5
Timing chart.............................. 7-5
Input signals to the printer........ 7-6
Output signals from the printer.. 7-7
Contents

Handshaking protocol................ 7-8
DTR (READY/BUSY)
protocol..................7-8
X-ON/X-OFF (I)/(II) protocol. 7-9
Special notes............................ 7-10
ETX/ACK protocol................. 7-11
Baud rate................................. 7-11
Serial data organization........... 7-11
Automatic serial/parallel
selection.......................... 7-11
8. Software commands..................... 8-1
● EPSON Software command........... 8-1
● IBM Software command................. 8-9
● HP Software command.................. 8-18
9. Software setup functions.......... 9-1
● Command format............................... 9-1
● Command............................................ 9-2
10. Specifications................................ 10-1
● Printing specifications.......................10-1
● Print mode specifications.................. 10-2
● Graphic printing specifications.......... 10-5
● Throughput...................................... 10-5
● Paper specifications.......................... 10-6
● Other specifications.......................... 10-6
11. Character set table.................... 11-1
EPSON italic table...................................11-1
EPSON extenced graphic table...................11-1
EPSON international font table.................. 11-2
IBM character set table 1...........................11-2
IBM character set table 2...........................11-3
IBM all-character set table.........................11-3
Code page 437........................................ 11-4
Code page 850........................................ 11-4
Code page 857 ........................................11-4
Code page 860 .......................................11-4
Code page 863........................................ 11-5
Code page 865........................................ 11-5
ISO-1 (ISO-8859-1)..................................11-5
Code page 858.......................................... 11-5
Code page 861.......................................... 11-6
Code page BRASCII.................................11-6
Code page ABICOMP...............................11-6
ROMAN-8 character set (HP)....................11-7
PC-8 character set (HP).............................11-7
LEGAL character set (HP).........................11-7
MATH 7 character set (HP)........................11-7
LINE DRAW character set (HP).................11-8
International character set (HP) [ISO].........11-8
●Index
●Software command list
Contents

i

◆ High-speed printing

Prining mode Pirnt speed Throughput

DRAFT (10 cpi) 603 CPS 206 LPM (132 columns)

LQ (10 cpi) 180 CPS 76 LPM (132 columns)

NLQ (10 cpi) 240 CPS 100 LPM (132 columns)

HQDR (10 cpi) 360CPS 135 LPM (132 columns)

S.D. (12 cpi only) 723 CPS 230 LPM (132 columns)

S.S.D. (15 cpi only) 904 CPS 270 LPM (132 columns)

◆ Original plus 8 multipart forms printing

The printer can print data on an original and up to eight

copies. Copy density can be enhanced by selecting the

DARK 1 (high pressure), DARK 2 (very high pressure) or

AUTO (automatic print pressure adjustment by sensing

the form set thickness). This setting is made in the

MULTIPART function of the SETUP MODE.

✽ : If DARK 1 or DARK 2 is selected, the printing

speed is reduced below the normal print speed

to compensate for the extra energy required

when printing in the high pressure print

modes.

◆ Bar code printing function

A variety of bar codes of this printer may be printed. The

narrow and wide spaces, narrow and wide bars, HRI,

check character, bar code height, and rotation may be

controlled with software commands. Customized bar

codes may also be printed using the element funcion.

Registered bar code formats: Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2

of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, Codabar, Code11, Code 39 , Code 93,

Code 128, EAN-8, EAN-13, UPC-A, UPC-E, and Postnet

◆ Enlarged character printing

Characters can be enlarged (by up to 127 times as large x

127 times as large) using the enlarged character command

unique to this printer. Software commands are used for

control.

●●

Major functions

This printer provides a wide range of print functions, as shown below:

ii

●●

Major functions

◆Zooming function (Batch enlargement or reduction printing)

◆Cut sheet paper manually loading

◆Skew sensor

A built-in skew sensor detects any cut sheets that are

skewed when loaded and ejects them.

◆Automatic head adjustment

The printer employs an automatic paper thickness

detection sensor, instead of the conventional paper

thickness adjust lever, for optimum printing on all form

sets.

◆Automatic loading (For fanfold or cut sheet paper)

◆Perforation cutting (For fanfold paper)

By pressing the TEAR OFF key, the perforation of fanfold

paper is automatically fed to the paper cutter position.

◆Paper parking (Switching fanfold paper and cut sheet paper)

If cut sheet paper is selected while fanfold paper is used,

the fanfold paper is automatically fed back to the parking

position (i.e., paper parking).

◆Load adjustment

The pritning start position may be adjusted within a

range from approximately 0 to 26.7 mm from the top of

the paper. It is recommended that the printing position

be in the center of the paper in the range of 4 mm or less

from the the top of the paper.

◆MICRO REVERSE LF and MICRO LF keys

These keys are useful for adjusting the printing start

position and paper cutting position.

◆Automatic scroll (For fanfold paper)

If no data input is recived for a preset period (0.5, 1, 5,

10, 15 sec.), the perfpration of the current page of fanfold

paper is fed to the paper cutter position.

iii

◆Dual paper parking

If the optional rear tractor is used, two different types of

fanfold paper may be used. Software command or the

PAPER PATH key can be used for selection.

◆Large 512KB communication buffer

◆Setup memory for setting various functions on the LCD

◆Ten resident fonts

◆Line feed speed adjustment

Standard, 1/2 or 1/3 line feed speed is selectable for

stable paper feeding even when multipart paper is used.

◆Vertical alignment function

◆Serial data transfer at a maximum rate of 38.4k bps

◆Parallel and serial interfaces are standard

Parallel and serial interface are switched automatically.

◆Printing stops immediately if the printer cover is

inadvertently opened during printing.

◆Enegy Star

iv

●●

Caution

★Unpack the printer. Make sure that the

printer body and all accessories are

included in the package and no parts are

damaged.

★Do not use the printer in a location

exposed to direct sunlight or close to a

heater or other heat generating

equipment.

★Before connecting or disconnecting the

interface cable, be sure to turn off the

printer.

★ Place the printer on a rigid, horizontal

base in a location that is free of vibration.

★Do not use the printer in a dusty location

or any location subject to sudden

changes in temperature and humidity.

★Do not connect the printer to a non-

standard power source.

★ Never try to print without a ribbon

cassette installed and paper loaded.

★Do not turn off the printer during

printing, as this may lead to a

malfunction.

★Take care not to twist the ribbon while

installing the ribbon cassette.

★Push the lock levers of both tractors

to the LOCK positions firmly while

loading fanfold paper or single sheet

paper. It is for the purpose of

setting paper path securely.

★If the case or cover becomes dirty,

clean it with a soft cloth moistened

with a small quantity of neutral

detergent diluted with water. Never

use a hard cloth or volatile solvent

such as alcohol, thinner, or benzine.

★If any foreign matter gets into the

printer, turn off the printer

immediately and remove the foreign

matter.

Cautions in operation

Safety Cautions

Cautions in setting up

See page 3-1.

CAUTION

!

Caution

Caution

★Use two hands and hold firmly at each

end when lifting the cut sheet feeder.

Personal injury can occur if the CSF unit

is dropped.

★Do not touch the print head immediately

after printing because it is too hot.

★Do not put your finger under the tractor

cover while loading fanfold paper.

v

●

The printer body weights approximately 24 kg [52.9 lbs.]. It should be

taken out of the package by two or more persons.

Make sure that no parts of the printer are damaged.

●●

Unpacking the printer

Printer

Ribbon Cassette

Power Cord

24-pin Dot-matrix Printer

FB-900

Hand book

CD-ROM

Hand book

Top Paper Rack

Unpacking the printer

vi

●●

Unpacking the printer

●

Check the carton for the following items:

24-pin Dot-matrix Printer

FB-90

0

Hand book

■

Printer

■

Ribbon cassette

#SBP-1051

■

Power cord

Connect this power cord to an

AC outlet.

If some part is not

included in the package,

contact the dealer where

you purchased the

printer.

Keep the carton and

packaging material.

They are needed for

transporting the printer

or returning it for

service if ever required.

■

Top paper rack

Attach the top paper rack to

eject paper to the top of the

printer. Sheets of paper are

stacked on this rack.

Caution

■

Hand book

■

CD-ROM

Driver-CD with Owner's

Manual, printer driver

software.

vii

●●

Dimensions

●

The following drawings show the outside dimensions of the printer.

300mm

250mm

520mm 630mm

505mm

395mm

442mm

The weight of the

printer including the

ribbon cassette is

approximately 24 kg

[52.9 lbs.]. Two

persons should carry

the printer.

Caution

viii

●●

Components and functions

1

1. Paper Guide (for Manual Feeding)

2. Paper Stacker (for Cut Sheet Feeder)

3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)

4. Control Panel

11. Power Switch

16. AC Receptacle

17. Serial Connector

18. Parallel Connector

12. Tractor

19. Rear Printer Cover

14. Top Cover

LCD: TOP COVER

5. Paper Rack

LCD: PAPER RACK

15. Rear Cover

LCD: REAR COVER

13. Top Paper Rack

8. Front Cover

LCD: FRONT COVER

10. Print Head

9. Ribbon Cassette

6. Paper Support Guide (for Manual Feeding)

20. Paper Cutter

7. Front Cover Lock Release Button

Appearance of the printer

ix

The names and functions of the printer components are shown below.

Name (See drawing on left.) Function

1. Paper guide Adjusts the printing position when feeding paper

manually.

2. Paper stacker When the optional CSF is used, sheets of paper

are ejected into this paper stacker. Both sides of

the paper stacker should be set up.

3. Liquid crystal display (LCD) Displays the condition and settings of the printer.

4. Control panel Displays and sets the printer conditions.

5. Paper rack If the “OPEN PAPER RACK” message is

desplayed on the LCD when setting the paper

path, open the paper rack.

6. Paper Support Guide Guide the cut sheet at manuarl feeding.

7. Front Cover Lock release button To open the front cover, push the two buttons

located on the lower corners of the front cover.

8. Front cover To mount fanfold paper on tractors or replace the

ribbon cassette, open the front cover.

9. Ribbon cassette If printed characters vecome pale, replace the

ribbon cassette.

10. Print head Prints characters on paper.

11. Power switch Pressing the power switch toggles the power on

and off.

ON: Switch depressed OFF: Switch released

12. Tractor The tractor pins engage sprocket holes on both

sides of fanfold paper for feeding.

13. Top paper rack Ejected cut sheets are stacked on the top paper

rack.

14. Top cover Eject fanfold paper to the top of the printer. If

the “OPEN TOP COVER” is displayed on the

LCD when setting the paepr path, open the top

cover.

15. Rear cover To eject fanfaold paper to the top of the prieter,

open the rear cover. If the “OPEN REAR

COVER” is displayed on the LCD when setting

the paper path, open the rear cover.

16. AC receptacle Connect the power to this AC receptacle. The

power is desigated on the rating plate on the back

of the printer.

17. Serial connector RS-232C interface connector

18. Parallel connector Parallel interface connector

19. Rear printer cover When the rear tractor or CSF is used, remove the

rear printer cover.

20. Paper Cutter Cut the paper after pressing the TEAR OFF key.

●●

Components and functions

Components and functions

x

●●

Components and functions

Control panel explanation 1

DATA ERROR ONLINE POWER

TEAR OFF ONLINE

PAPER PATH

FORM FEED

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

TOF SET

QUALITY

EJECT/LOAD

PAPER FORM

RESET

SET UP

MICRO LF

MICRO RLF

EXIT

EXTENDED

ENTER

ALT

FORM

1.5

x

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

F.TR REAR

1

2

3

4

5

6

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

7

9

8

10

1234

State display Lamps

State display LCD

Key Panel

Blinks while data is transferred.

Lights while data is processed except

during communication or when the

input buffer contains data. Goes out

in other conditions.

ON : Paper is not detected some

other operational error has

occurred.

OFF : Paper is detected.

Blinking : A functional error (such

as home sense error,

internal RAM error,

paper path switching error,

head adjustment error,

park error and skew error)

ON : Printing is enabled.

OFF : Printing is disabled.

Blinking : The cover is open, or

the printer is in the head

temperature protect

condition.

On when printer power is turned on.

State display lamps

1

2

3

4

115

xi

●●

Components and functions

.5x15F.TR REAR 1

F. TR

R. TR

MAN

CSF

: Front Tractor

: Rear Tractor

: Manual

: Cut Sheet Feeder

REAR

TOP

FRNT

: Rear

: Top

: Front

1inch=25.4mm

Paper In Paper Out

15: 15 inches 12: 12 inches 10: 10 inches 5: 5 inches

Paper Width (Fanfold Paper)

2

16.5

A3

A4

A5

Page Length (Fanfold Paper)

Paper Size (Cut Sheet Paper)

: 2 inches

: 16.5 inches

: A3

: A4

: A5

LT

HLT

LG

EX

GLT

GLG

LD

F4

PC

C6

C10

MN

DL

C5

: LETTER

: HALF LETTER

: LEGAL

: EXECUTIVE

: GOVERNMENT LETTER

: GOVERNMENT LEGAL

: LEDGER

: F4 SIZE

: POST CARD

: COMMERCIAL-6

: COMMERCIAL-10

: MONARCH

: DL Envelope

: C5 Envelope

Feeds the perforation of fanfold paper to the paper

cutter poistion. (For fanfold paper only)

(ALT + TEAR OFF keys)

Press these keys for two seconds or more. Release

the keys when "INITIAL" is displayed on the LCD.

The printer will be reset.

Changes the paper path display. To select the

displayed paper path, press the ENTER key.

(ALT + PAPER PATH keys)

When paper is loaded, the current printing position is

considered as the TOF position.

Loads paper or feed back paper to the parking

position when fanfold paper is used. Loads or

and ejects paper when cut sheet paper is uesd.

(ALT + EJECT/LOAD keys)

Changes the printing quality display. To select

the displayed mode, press the ENTER key.

Enters the SETUP MODE.

Quits the SETUP MODE or EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

(ALT + SETUP keys)

Enters the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

Selects an item displayed in the SETUP MODE,

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE, setting the

paper path, setting the paper form or setting the

printing quality.

1

2

3

4

5

6

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

7

9

8

When pressing the corresponding key while you

press the ALT key, one of the following

functions is executed.

Changes the printing enable (online) state and

printing disable (offline) state.

Changes the paper form display. To select the

displayed paper form, press the ENTER key.

Feeds one page.

Feeds one line in the forward direction at a pitch

of 1/6 inch.

(ALT + LINE FEED keys)

Feeds one line in the forward direction at a pitch

of 1/360 inch.

(Micro line feed)

Feeds one line in the reverse direction at a pitch

of 1/6 inch.

(ALT + REVERSE LF keys)

Feeds one line in the reverse direction at a pitch

of 1/360 inch.

(Micro reverse line feed)

18

State display LCD

Keys on the panel

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

SET UP

EJECT/LOAD

PAPER PATH

TEAR OFF

MICRO LF

MICRO RLF

EXTENDED SETUP

QUALITY

TOF SET

RESET

1

Orientation (Cut Sheet Paper) p: Portrait l: Landscape

Page

Length

Control panel explanation 2

xii

#FB-84008

Cut sheet feeder Rear tractor

For attaching the cut sheet feeder,

see pages 1-22 to 1-26. For attaching the rear tractor, see pages 1-16 to 1-18.

Print head

#FB-90090

For mounting the print head, refer to the manual

supplied with the print head.

Ribbon cassette

#SBP-1051

For attaching the ribbon cassette,

see pages 1-2 and 1-3.

Current loop interface unit

RS-422A interface unit

#FB-84011#FB-84010

#FB-84009

This unit enables data to be transferred through

an RS-422A interface. This is a built-in unit

that is installed by the dealer. If the RS-422A

interface unit is installed, the RS-232C

interface cannot be used.

This unit converts serial data into 20 mA

current loop signals. This is a built-in unit that

is installed by the dealer. If the current loop

interface unit is installed, the RS-232C

interface cannot be used.

The cut sheet feeder feeds cut sheets automatically

and continuously. A maximum of 150 sheets of

paper (55 kg paper) may be set in the holder of the

cut sheet feeder.

Dual paper parking is available when the rear

tractor is used. Two different types of paper may

be set onto the front and rear tractors and may be

selected by issuing software commands or

pressing the PAPER PATH key to change the

paper paths.

●●

Options and consumables

xiii

●●

Maintenance

Periodic maintenance and inspection is recommended to keep

the printer in good condition.

●

Remove paper particles or dust adhered to

the detection sensor cover upper surfaces

(three locations) inside the printer and to the

paper jam sensor surface (one location), by

wiping with a soft clth or a cotton bud. The

paper particles or dust on the sensor

surfaces may cause faulty operation.

Detection sensor Detection sensor

Paper jam sensor

Do not use a hard brush to clean the

sensor cover and the sensor surface.

The brush may scratch the surface.

Caution

When opening the front cover just

after the printer has been in operation,

do not touch the printer heard which

is hot and may cause burns.

Caution

!

1-1

—1. Setting up the printer—

1. Setting up the printer

●

Make sure that the power switch is set to off.

Connect the printer with the supplied power

cord to an AC outlet.

●

The AC outlet shall be installed near the

printer and shall be easily accessible.

To AC outlet

Connect the AC power plug to an AC outlet of the voltage

designated on the rating plate on the back of the pirnter.

Once the printer is turned off, wait for three seconds or

more before turning it on again. If the printer is turned

on again within three seconds after turning it off, it

may malfunction due to an initializtion failure.

Caution

●●

Connecting the printer to Power

1. Turn the ribbon feed knob on the ribbon

cassette counterclockwise to stretch the

ribbon tight.

2. Turn off the power. Open the front cover.

3. Attach the ribbon cassette as shown below.

1-2

Do not touch the print head immediately

after printing becouse it is too hot.

Use the specified

ribbon cassette .

When power is turned

off, data in the buffer

is lost. Output all data

before turning off the

printer.

Open the front cover by

pressing both side locks

with both hands. Hold

both sides with both

hands to raise it upward

slowly. When closing

the front cover, hold

both sides with both

hands to pull it down

slowly. Press the front

cover to lock it.

Stretch the ribbon

Ribbon feed knob

Installing the ribbon cassette

Approximately 15 seconds after the printer is rutned on, the print head will move to

the left.

Print head position

Front cover

Power switch

Every press of the power

switch turns the power on

or off.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Installing the ribbon cassette

Caution

Caution

CAUTION

!

1-3

●

Installing the ribbon cassette

—1. Setting up the printer—

4. Slide the ribbon toward the print head so

that the ribbon is lightly in contact with the

projection of the print head.

5. Attach the cassette firmly to the mounting

plate. Turn the ribbon feed knob

counterclockwise.

Fit the right and left projections on the mounting plate to the holes in

the bottom of the ribbon cassette.

6. Close the front cover.

Pull down the front cover slowly toward you with both hands from

both sides to close it.

Push down on both sides at the bottom of the front cover to close it

firmy. Two hands are required to engage and lockthe front cover on

both sides.

Slide

Slide

Projection

Ribbon feed knob

1-4 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Paper path

1

2

Paper loading direction

Rear tractor

(Optional)

Paper loading

direction

3

Paper rack

2. Front loading, top ejection

This paper path applies a smaller load to the paper.

This is recommended for printing on thick paper

(such as multipart paper or label sheets).

1. Front loading, rear ejection

This paper path is recommended if fanfold paper is

cut along the perforation frequently.

The perforation is automatically fed to the paper

cutter of the top cover by pressing the TEAR OFF

key so that the paper may be torn off easily.

To cut the paper, hold the upper cover firmly with

one hand and tear the paper towards you.

3. Rear loading, front ejection

Dual paper parking is available when the optional

rear tractor is used. Two types of fanfold paper of

different size and thickness may be used and

selected from the control panel or by issuing a

software command (ESC EM or software setup*)

from the computer.

* Software setup commands

The software setup commands are unique to this

printer. Most functions available on the SETUP

MODE and EXTENDED SETUP MODE can may

11x 5F.TR REAR

11x 5FTRTOP

11x 5R.TR FR T N

Liquid crystal display

Inside of the printer viewed

from the right.

✩

Inside of the printer viewed

from the right.

✩

.

1

1

1

Path of fanfold paper

The three fanfold paper paths shown below are available. For selecting a paper

path, See pages 1-6 and 1-7.

Rear tractor (Option)

Front tractor

1-5

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Paper path

Path of cut sheet paper

The five cut sheet paper paths shown below are available.

1. Front loading, front ejection

This paper path applies a lighter load on feeding paper. This

is recommended for printing on thick paper (such as

multipart paper, postcards, and envelopes).

3. Front loading, top ejection

This paper path enables face-down stacking.

1

3

2

Paper loading

direction

4. CSF loading, front ejection

This paper path is suitable for thick paper (such as multipart

paper, postcards and so on). Sheets of paper are stacked face-up.

5. CSF loading, top ejection

This paper path enables face-down stacking.

Paper loading

direction

4

5

A4 pMAN F RN T

A4 pMAN REAR

A4 pMAN TO P

A4 pCSF FR

A4 pCSF TOP

Inside of the printer

viewed from the right.

✩

✩

This paper path applies a lighter load on feeding paper. It is

recommended for printing on thick paper (such as multipart

paper, postcards, and envelopes).

NT

2. Front loading, rear ejection

Inside of the printer

viewed from the right.

Manual paper feeding

Cut sheet paper (Option)

●Sheets of paper are loaded manually one at a time.

1-6 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Selecting the Paper path

1. Press the PAPER PATH key.

The paper path currently selected is displayed.

2. Continue to press the PAPER PARH key until

“PATH: F. TR. -> TOP ” is displayed. Press

the ENTER key.

Selecting the paper path

The following shows an example of changing the paper path for reference. The

example shown below changes front tractor loading and rear ejection to the front

tractor loading and top ejection.

11x 5

F.

TR EA

IN OUT FORM

PAPER PATH

>

RE

T

F

-APH

.T

RA

PAPER PATH

R

.:

1RR

PAPER PATH

ENTER

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

11x 5F

.

RT

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

1

MEM 1F.R->R ATERO

MEM 1F.R->T PTO

->T PO

O

1-7

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Selecting the paper path

1

1

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

1

1

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

◆Cut sheet paper (Manual feeding)

◆Fanfold paper

1

1

◆Cut sheet paper (Optional cut sheet feeder)

1

◆Fanfold paper (Optional rear tractor)

LOAD

EJECTION

LOAD

EJEC-

TI

ON

EJEC-

TIO

N

LOAD

EJECTION

EJECTION

EJECTION

LOAD

EJECTION

EJEC-

TION

F

.

TR REA

F

.

TR TOP

R

.

TR FRN

MAN F RN

MAN R EA

MAN TOP

CSF TOP

CSF FRN

EJEC-

TION

R

T

T

R

T

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

The optional CSF and rear tractor cannot be used together. If the optional CSF or rear tractor is

installed, enable it by using the EXTENDED SETUP MODE (#60 option). If the option is not

enabled on the EXTENDED SETUP MODE, the paper path cannot be selected.

1-8 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Paper

16 mm or more

0/60 inch - 63/60 inches

(#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT on SETUP

MODE)

2 mm

Printing area

Printing area

5, 10, 15 inches

(#5 PAPER WIDTH on SETUP MODE)

Perforation

2.5 - 16.5 Inches

(#4 PAGE LENGTH on SETUP MODE)

0/6 inch - 15/6 inches

(#6 TOP MARGIN on SETUP

MODE)

0/6 inch - 15/6 inches

(#7 BOTTOM MARGIN on

SETUP MODE)

Last page

Paper form Multipart

form

Rear tractor 3 ~ 16.5 inches (76 ~ 420mm)

19 or less 1

0.08

~ 0.12mm

55 ~ 90kg 34kg x 9P

0.12

~ 0.59mm 0.12

~ 0.18mm

125kg or less

Front tractor 3 ~ 16 inches (76 ~ 406mm)

Paper width

Number of sheets

Thickness

Paper weight

16 mm or more

Label

form

Single

Paper quality Wood-free paper

22 holes

Page length

0.5 inch × 22 = 11 inches

0.5 inch

30 holes

Page width

0.5 inch × 30 = 15 inches

Page length

Paper width

Sprocket holes are made on both sides

of fanfold paper at an interval of 0.5

inch, which can be used to calculate

the page length and width.

The page length can be determined by

multiplying the number of sprocket

holes per page by 0.5 inch.

To find the paper width, use another

sheet of fanfold paper and count the

number of sprocket holes.

Printing area on fanfold paper

Calculating sizes of fanfold paper

Sizes of fanfold paper are

generally shown in inches.

One inch is 25.4 mm.

When fanfold paper is used, set the page length (#4 PAGE LENGTH) and paper

width (#5 PAPER WIDTH) on the SETUP MODE. For setting, see page 1-12.

1-9

A4, LETTER, LEGAL, A3, etc

(#4 PAGE LENGTH on SETUP MODE)

0/60 inch - 63/60 inches

(#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT on SETUP

MODE)

4mm

Printing area

2 mm or more2 mm or more

Horizontally loaded

size A5 sheets and

postcards cannot be

ejected upward.

Standard-size form Multipart paper

Glued portion

Approx. 0.5 mm

The thickness of the bound

portion is the sum of the

paper thickness and 0.25 mm

or less.

Use wood-free paper. Cut sheet paper can be

loaded manually or by using the CSF.

Paper form

Paper quality

Number of sheets

Thickness (mm)

Paper weight

Single

0.08 ~ 0.12

55 ~ 90kg 34kg x 9P

0.12 ~ 0.59 0.08 ~ 0.8 0.5 or less

Wood-free

paper Wood-free paper

0.08 ~ 0.11

55 ~ 78Kg 34kg x 6P

0.12 ~ 0.39 0.08 ~ 0.22

Manual paper feeding CSF paper feeing

Available standards-size forms

Envelopes and horizontally set post cards

cannot be printed by using the CSF.

Non-carbon, middle carbon

and back carbon multipart

paper can be used.

Multipart

form

19 or less 11

Card Envelope

Carbon or

non-carbon

Paper form

Paper quality

Number of sheets

Thickness (mm)

Paper weight

Paper length

Single

Wood-free

paper

1

Multipart

form

6 or less

Non-carbon

140mm and over

Card

Wood-free

paper

1

39 ~ 78kg 55 ~ 165kg

Paper Size Manual Feeding CSF Feeding

A3

A4

A5

Letter

Half Letter

Legal

Executive

Government Legal

Government Letter

Ledger

F4

Post card

Commercial -6

Commercial -10

Monarch

DL

C5

Portrait Landscape Landscape

(297mm X 420mm)

(210mm X 297mm)

(148mm X 210mm)

(8.5" X 11")

(5.5" X 8.5")

(8.5" X 14")

(7.25" X 10.5")

(8.5" X 13")

(8" X 10.5")

(11" X 17")

(210mm X 330mm)

(100mm X 148mm)

(6 1/2" X 3 5/8")

(9 1/2" X 4 1/8")

(3 7/8" X 7 1/2")

(110mm X 220mm)

(162mm X 229mm)

❈1 Paper length 150mm (5.9inch) or less can not be ejected to the top.

❈2 A3 (portrait) or Ledger (portrait) can not be stacked on the top paper rack.

Regular size formEnvelope

Portrait

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Paper

Printing area on cut sheet paper Specify the paper size of cut sheet paper using #4 PAGE

LENGTH on the SETUP MODE. For setting, see page 1-19.

1-10 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Selecting the paper form

Paper form selection 1

15

12:

10:

5:

15 inches

12 inches

10 inches

5 inches

Paper Width

(Fanfold Paper)

2

16.5

A3

A4

A5

LT

HLT

LG

LD

EX

: 2 inches

: 16.5 inches

: A3

: A4

: A5

: LETTER

: HALF LETTER

: LEGAL

: LEDGER

: EXECUTIVE

Page Length (Fanfold Paper)

Paper Size (Cut Sheet Paper)

GLT

GLG

F4

PC

C6

C10

MN

DL

C5

: GOVERNMENT LETTER

: GOVERNMENT LEGAL

: F4 SIZE

: POST CARD

: COMMERCIAL-6

: COMMERCIAL-10

: MONARCH

: DL Envelop

: C5 Envelop

F1.5x 5

.TR REAR1

p:

l: Portrait

Landscape

Orientation

(Cut Sheet Paper)

Page

Length

1

11x 5F

.

TR REAR

IN OUT FORM

PAPER PATH PAPER FORM

4Ap4

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

111 I x 15

IN

1

211 I x 15

NIN

311 I x 15

IN

5Ap4

6Ap4

N

N

Factory default setting

Liquid crystal display

If the EEPROM is

initialized, preset form

sizes are replaced by the

factory default settings.

Sizes of up to six frequently-used forms may be stored in MEMO 1 to MEMO 6 in the internal memory.

Any of the stored sizes may be read out of the memory with the PAPER FORM key whenever necessary.

See page 1-31.

1-11

—1. Setting up the printer—

1. Press the PAPER FORM key.

The paper size currently selected is displayed.

2. Continue to press the PAPER FORM key to

select MEMO 3 as shown below.

3. Specify the intended form size as shown

below.

4. The A5 portrait form is set in MEMO 3.

●

Selecting the paper form

Paper form selection 2

The following shows an example of setting form size for reference. The example below

shows how to change the size stored in MEMO 3 ( page length: 11 inches, paper width:

15 inches) to an A5 portrait form.

Specifying form size

11 5xF

.

TR RE

I

IN OUT PAPER FORM

PAPER PATH

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

PAPER FORM PAPER FORM

N1xIA1R11N51

SET UP

F.TR REAR 11 x 15 1. MULTIPART

4. PAGE LENGTH SIZE: A5 p

PAGE:11 INCH

1. MULTIPART

SIZE: A5 p*

ENTER

SIZE: A5 p

EXIT

SAVE?: YES

ENTER

SAVE?: YES

F.TR REAR A5 p

4. PAGE LENGTH

4. PAGE LENGTH

PAPER PATH

ENTER

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

11x 5F

.

RT

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

FORM

1

MEM 1F.R->R ATERO

MEM 1F.R->T PTO

->T PO

O

1-12

1. Check the rating of the fanfold paper to be

used that is marked on the side of the

package.

2. Press the PAPER PATH key to select the

desired paper path.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Front tractor)

Fanfold paper setting procedures 1

This section describes how to set fanfold paper for front loading and rear ejection

or front loading and top ejection. Before setting fanfold paper, it is necessary to

specify the page length, paper width, etc. on the SETUP MODE.

Rating

10 X 11 - 1P

Page lengthPaper width

Fanfold paper rating marked on side of package (Example)

Multipart paper

(Number of sheets)

Paper loading direction

Paper loading direction

F.TR REAR 11 x 15 F.TR TOP 11 x 15

1

1

3. Specify the page length using #4 PAGE

LENGTH on the SETUP MODE as shown

below.

4. Then specify the paepr width using #5

PAPER WIDTH on the SETUP MODE as

shown below.

1-13

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Front tractor)

Fanfold paper setting procedures 2

SET UP

1. MULTIPART

4. PAGE LENGTH

1. MULTIPART

ENTER

4. PAGE LENGTH

F.TR REAR A5 p

PAGE: 11 INCH

SIZE: A5 p*

PAGE: 11 INCH

PAGE: 11 INCH*

4.PAGE LENGTH

ENTER

5.PAPER WIDTH

SAVE?: YES

F.TR REAR 11 x 10

WIDTH: 10 INCH

WIDTH: 15 INCH*

WIDTH: 10 INCH*

ENTER

WIDTH: 10 INCH

EXIT

SAVE?: YES

5.PAPER WIDTH

1-14

5. Open the front cover.

6. Lift to release the tractor lock lever. Move

the left tractor to the triangle mark. Then

push down on the lever.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Front tractor)

Fanfold paper setting procedures 3

Do not put your finger under the tractor cover.

Triangle mark

Lock lever

Release

Lock

Tractor guide

Release Lock

CAUTION

!

Open the front cover by

pressing both side locks

with both hands. Hold

both sides with both

hands to raise it upward

slowly. When closing

the front cover, hold

both sides with both

hands to pull it down

slowly. Press the front

cover to lock it.

Caution

Push the lock levers of

both tractors to the

LOCK positions firmly.

If the lock levers

protrude from the

tractor covers, paper

will not be fed properly,

resulting in paper

jamming.

Caution

In order to load

less than 5 inch

width fanfold

paper, remove one

or two tractor

guides.

1-15

7. Open the tractor covers on both sides. Fit

the sprocket holes on both sides of the

fanfold paper to the tractor pins. Then close

the tractor covers. Push down the lock lever

of the right tractor.

8. Close the front cover.

Hold both sides of the front cover with both

hands and pull down the front cover slowly.

Press the front cover to lock it.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Front tractor)

Fanfold paper setting procedures 4

By default, paper is

fed to the 14/60

inch (approximately

6 mm) position

from the top. This position

may be freely adjusted on

the SETUP MODE

between 0/60 inch (0 mm)

and 63/60 inches

(approximately 26.7 mm)

from the top of paper or the

perforation at a pitch of

1/60 inch.

The TOF position can be set from 0/60 inch (0

mm). However, if this position is set to 0/60 to

9/60 inch, paper may jam, depending on the paper condition. Normally,

it is recommended that the TOF position be adjusted to the 14/60 inch

(approximately 6 mm) position from the top of the paper.

Caution

when setting the paper on the tracter, Take care

not to over tighten or allow too much slack. Over

tightening deforms the guide holes and the paper may become

disconnected from the tracter during printing. Too much slack may

cause the paper to become clogged when it is inserted.

Caution

1-16 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Rear tractor)

1. Detach the rear printer cover from the

printer.

2. Install the rear tractor, and plug in the

connector.

Dual paper parking is available if the optional rear tractor is used. This funcion

enables two types of fanfold paper of different formats to be set together and

selected with the PAPER PATH key on the printer or by issuing a setup command

from the computer.

1

Leg

Leg

1

Paper setting procedures usig rear tarctor 1

Pull the upper

part of the rear

printer cover to

the front to

detach it from the printer.

When attaching the rear

printer cover, insert

the two legs into the

printer and then press

the rear printer cover

to lock it.

1-17

—1. Setting up the printer—

3. Adjust the tractor guides so that they are

located at almost the same interval. Lift and

release the tractor lock levers. Move the left

tractor to the triangle mark, then push down

the lever.

4. Set fanfold paper onto the rear tractor. Push

down the lock lever of the right rear tractor.

●

Loading fanfold paper (Rear tractor)

Triangle mark

1

Tractor guide

Lock

Release

1

Paper setting procedures usig rear tarctor 2

Push the lock levers of

both tractors to the

LOCK positions firmly.

Caution

Do not put your

finger under the

tractor cover.

CAUTION

!

In order to load

less than 8 inch

width fanfold

paper, remove

one or two tractor

guides.

1-18

5. Enter the EXTENDED SETUP MODE. Select

the rear tractor on this menu so that the

printer recognizes that the rear tractor is in

use.

6. Press the PAPER PATH key to select REAR

Tr FRONT.

7. “OPEN PAPER RACK” will be displayed. Open

the paper rack.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading fanfold paper (Rear tractor)

SET UP

F.TR REAR 11 x 10 20. EMULATION

60. OPTION

NOT INSTALL*

60. OPTION

ENTER

EXIT

F.TR REAR 11 x 10

ALT

60. OPTION

INITIAL

INITIAL OPTION: REAR Tr.*

OPTION: REAR Tr.

OPTION: REAR Tr.

Paper setting procedures usig rear tarctor 3

1. Check the rating of the cut sheet paper to be

used that is marked on the side of the

package.

2. Press the PAPER PAHTH key to select

MANUAL FRONT or MANUAL TOP, or MANUAL

REAR .

3. Specify the form size correctly on the

SETUP MODE (#4 PAGE LENGTH).

1-19

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading cut paper (manual paper feeding)

Select Manual feeding procedures 1

This section describes how to load cut sheet paper, showing an example of using

an A5 portrait form. Before loading a cut sheet, it is necessary to specify the

paper size on the SETUP MODE. Be sure to load cut sheet paper one sheet at a

Rating

A5 (Wood-Free / 70kg)

Wood-free paper

Form size

Cut sheet paper rating marked on side of

package (Example)

Paper weight

1. MULTIPART

4. PAGE LENGTH SIZE: A5 p

SIZE: A4 p*

4. PAGE LENGTH

SIZE: A5 p *

ENTER

SIZE: A5 p

ENTER

SET UP

MAN FRNT A4 p

1. MULTIPART

SAVE? : YES*

EXIT

4. PAGE LENGTHSAVE? : YES

MAN FRNT A5 p

1-20

4. Adjust the edge of the paper guide to

approximately 2 mm left of the triangle mark.

Refer to page 1-21 regarding use of the paper rack guide.

●

Loading cut paper (manual paper feeding)

—1. Setting up the printer—

Select Manual feeding procedures 2

Mark

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA

1

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

LOAD

EJECTION

EJEC-

TION

MAN F

MAN

REA TOP

1

EJECTION

R

RN

T

MAN

The triangle mark shows the printing start

position at the left of the printer.

1-21

5. Insert a sheet of paper straight along the

paper guide.

If paper is inserted at a skewed angle, the skew sensor detects

and the paper is ejected.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Loading cut paper (manual paper feeding)

Insert sheets of paper one at a time along the paper

guide. Only one sheet at a time can be set on the

paper rack.

Select Manual feeding procedures 3

To alternate manual printing and printing with the

optional rear tractor or CSF, be sure to move the

paper guide to the left end after completion of

manual printing. Further, return the paper guide of the paper rack

to the left end. If printing is performed using the rear tractor or

CSF with the paper guide left in the manual feeding position,

paper loaded form the back will hit the paper guide, resulting in

paper jamming.

Move the Paper Guide and the Paper Support Guide to the left end.

Caution

Caution

When using wide paper, insert

the paper using the paper

support guide attached to the

left end of the paper rack.

1-22

1. Press the EJECT/LOAD key to move back

the fanfold paper.

2. Enter the EXTENDED SETUP MODE

according to the proceures shown below

and select #60 OPTION on the menu. Select

CSF (cut sheet feeder).

3. Detach the rear printer cover from the

printer.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Printing using the cut sheet feeder (Option)

Printing procedures using CSF 1

An optional cut sheet feeder is available for this printer. The cut sheet feeder is

useful for continuous printing on cut sheets.

The paper holder of the cut sheet feeder accommodates a maximum of 150 sheets

(of 55 kg paper). Normal paper and multipart paper can be used.

SET UP

F.TR REAR 11 x 10 20. EMULATION

60. OPTION OPTION: CSF

NOT INSTALL*

60. OPTION

OPTION: CSF*

ENTER

EXIT

F.TR REAR 11 x 10

ALT

60. OPTION

INITIAL

INITIAL

OPTION: CSF

1

Leg

Leg

Pull the upper

part of the rear

printer cover to

the front to

detach it from the printer.

When attaching the rear

printer cover, insert the

two legs into the printer

and then press the rear

printer cover to lock it.

1-23

4. Attach the hoppers and center support to

the cut sheet feeder.

5. Attach the cut sheet feeder to the back of

the printer.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Printing using the cut sheet feeder (Option)

Printing procedures using CSF 2

1

CSF

1

Hopper

Center support

Use two hands and hold

firmly at each end when

lifting the cut sheet

feeder. Personal injury

can occur if the CSF unit

is dropped.

CAUTION

!

1-24

6. Shuffle the paper as show below.

7. Turn the CSF release levers to the front to

release the paper bins.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Printing using the cut sheet feeder (Option)

Printing procedures using CSF 3

Be sure to shuffle sheets sufficiently before setting

them. Otherwise, several sheets of paper may be fed

at the same time resulting in a paper jam.

CSF release lever

Caution

1-25

8. Turn the paper guide lock levers to the

RELEASE positions to adjust the paper

width.

9. Turn the paper guide lock levers to the

LOCK positions.

—1. Setting up the printer—

●

Printing using the cut sheet feeder (Option)

1

Mark

Adjust the edge of the paper guide to

appriximately 2mm left (outside) of the

triangle mark.

CARD

Paper guide lock lever

Postcard changeover lever

When printing on postcards,

turn this lever down.

Release Lock

Printing procedures using CSF 4

The triangle mark shows the printing start

position at the left of the paper.

Adjust the paper guide

to remove the gap

between the paper and

the paper guide, ensuring

that the paper does not press

too tightly against the paper

guide to avoide faulty

feeding.

1-26 —1. Setting up the printer—

●

Printing using the cut sheet feeder (Option)

10. Move the CSF release levers to the back to

fix the paper bins.

11. Press the PAPER PATH key to select CSF

FRONT or CSF TOP.

12. Press the ENTER key to select the displayed

paper path.

CSF TOP A4 p CSF FRNT A4 p

Printing procedures using CSF 5

1-27

—1. Setting up the printer—

1. Turn on the printer power while keeping the

LINE FEED key, or LINE FEED and ONLINE

keys depressed.

After initialization, the printer enters the self-test mode and starts the

self-test.

During printing, the ONLINE lamp blinks at an interval of 0.5 second.

The following message is displayed on the LCD.

The draft or LQ self-test prints the ASCII character in a rolling pattern.

2. To pause the self-test, press the ONLINE

key.

To terminate the self-test, keep the ALT and

RESET keys depressed for two seconds or

more, or turn the power switch to off.

●

Running self-test

It is recommended that a self-test of the printer be performed before connecting

the printer to the computer. The printer can execute the self-test by itself to check

on printing quality, printing pressure, and any printer troubles.

Draft self-test printing: Turn on power while pressing the

LINE FEED key.

LQ self-test printing: Turn on power while pressing the LINE

FEED and ONLINE keys.

Draft self-test printing “SELF TEST DRAFT”

LQ self-test printing “SELF TEST LQ”

1-28 —1. Setting up the printer—

1. Make sure that the power switch is turned to

off. Connect the signal cable to the printer

and computer.

2. Specify the following parallel interface

parameters on the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE.

●

Connecting the printer to the computer

13

25

1

14

Close the latches to secure

the connector.

Latches

Parallel Interface

The printer has a Centronics parallel interface and an RS-232S serial interface

as standard features.

Select the appropriate interface according to the computer and application

software to be used.

Connecting the priter to the computer

The printer has been set to the normal parallel

interface setting before shipment. If the default

setting does not provide proper communication,

recheck the interface setting shown below.

EXTENDED SETUP MODE Default setting page

#70. INTERFACE Parallel 3-46

#71. SELECT IN ENABLE 0 3-47

#81. BUFFER SIZE 512 KB 3-52

#82. BUSY/ACK TIMING TYPE 2 3-53

#83. DATA LATCH TIMING TYPE F. 3-53

#84. ERROR STATUS YES 3-54

1-29

—1. Setting up the printer—

1. Make sure that the power switch is turned to

off. Connect the signal cable to the printer

and computer.

2. Specify the following serial interface

parameters on the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE.

●

Connecting the printer to the computer

Serial Interface

13

25

1

14

Tighten the screws on both

sides of the connector.

Specify the following serial interface parameters on

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

EXTENDED SETUP MODE Default setting Page

#70. INTERFACE Parallel 3-46

#

71. SELECT IN ENABLE 0

3-47

#

72. PARITY BIT Non

3-47

#

73. DATA LENGTH 8 bits

3-48

#

74. STOP BIT 1 bit

3-48

#

75. PROTOCOL DTR

3-49

#

76. BAUD RATE 9600 bps

3-49

#

77. SERIAL ERROR Print

3-50

#

78. CTS ENABLE No

3-50

#

79. CD ENABLE No

3-51

#

80. DSR ENABLE No

3-51

#81. BUFFER SIZE 512 KB 3-52

1-30 —1. Setting up the printer—

1. Turn on the printer power while keeping the

FORM FEED key or FORM FEED and ONLINE

keys depressed.

While printing the hexadecimal dump list, the following message is

displayed.

2. Output data from the computer to the

printer.

The printer will begin to print the hexadecimal dump list.

3. To stop the dump list printing, depress the

ALT and RESET keys for approximately two

seconds or turn the power switch to off.

●

Input data hexadecimal dump

The printer can print an input data hexadecimal dump list, which contains all

input data in hexadecimal codes and corresponding ASCII characters. It is

possible to use this dump list to check whether data is being transferred in the

proper format by the computer to the printer when printing is not performed

properly.

Outputting the hexadecimal dump list

Draft printing: Turn on power while pressing the FORM FEED key.

LQ printing: Turn on power while pressing the FORM FEED and

ONLINE keys.

HEX DUMP LQHEX DUMP DRAFT

1-31

●

Link between paper path (PATH)

and paper form (MEMO)

1. Press the PAPER PATH key to select the

PATH you want to use. Press the ENTER

key.

2. Press the PAPER FORM key to select the

MEMO you want to use. Press the ENTER

key.

3. PATH has been linked to MEMO.

Now, switching to the PATH automatically selects the MEMO linked

to it.

Changes of #1 to #17 on the SETUP MODE are reflected only in the

MEMO linked to the currently selected PATH.

—1. Setting up the printer—

When PATH is changed, MEMO used in a newly set PATH will be changed

automatically.

There are six types of MEMO: MEMO1 through MEMO6. Each MEMO stores

the settings of #1 to #18 on the SETUP MODE.

FRONT TRACTOR REAR

TOP

FRONT

TOP

REAR

FRONT

FRONT

TOP

MANUAL

REAR TRACTOR

CSF

MEMO 6

MEMO 5

MEMO 4

MEMO 3

MEMO 2

MEMO 1

1. MULTIPART

2. HEAD ADJUST

3. TOP ADJUST

4. PAGE LENGTH

5. PAPER WIDTH

6. TOP MARGIN

7. BOTTOM MARGIN

8. LEFT MARGIN

9. RIGHT MARGIN

10. QUALITY

11. FONT SELECT

12. CHARACTER PITCH

13. LF PITCH

14. ZOOM IN/OUT

15. PAPER FASTENER

16. PERFORATION

17. FANFOLD FEED

18. PAPER QUALITY

PAPER PATH

[ IN ] [ OUT ]

Link between PATH and

MEMO by default

Switching links between PATH and MEMO

11 5xF.TR TO R

IN OUT FORM

PAPER PATH

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

PAPER PATH FORM

15xTRE 1FAP R.1 1

111x15

FORM

x5F. E 11TR R AR

IN OUT FORM

PAPER PATH

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

IN OUT

PAPER PATH

ENTER

PAPER FORM

IN 311x15IN

NIIN

FORM

1

DATA ERROR ONLINE POWER

TEAR OFF ONLINE

PAPER PATH

FORM FEED

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

TOF SET

QUALITY

EJECT/LOAD

PAPER FORM

RESET

SET UP

MICRO LF

MICRO RLF

EXIT

EXTENDED

ENTER

ALT

1234

1

1TEAR OFF Press the TEAR OFF key, and the printer automatically feeds the

perforation of the paper to the paper cutter position (for fanfold paper

only).

If the perforation is not adjusted to the cutter position, correct the

position with the MICRO LF or MICRO RLF key. The corrected

position is saved in memory, and the perforation is fed automatically to

the paper cutter position next time.

(ALT + TEAR OFF keys)

Press the TEAR OFF key for two seconds or more while you press the

ALT key. When an "INITIAL" is displayed on the LCD, release the

keys. The printer will be reset immediately.

Even during printing, printing can be stopped immediately by resetting

the printer. When the printer is reset, it enters the busy state, the buffer

is cleared, and the printer restarts in the condition that was set on the

SETUP MODE or EXTENDED SETUP MODE (saved in the

EEPROM).

TEAR OFF

RESET

RESET

TEAR OFF

RESET

ALT

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

2

2.

Control panel operations

2-1

—2. Control panel operations —

Function Keys 1

The liquid crystal display (LCD) on the control panel displays the processing

conditions of the printer and the settings of the functions. The keys on the control

panel provide various functions.

Control Panel

2-2 —2. Control panel operations—

PAPER PATH Press the PAPER PATH key to change the paper path.

When the PAPER PATH key is pressed, the currently selected

paper path is displayed. Every press of the PAPER PATH key

alternates the LCD display as shown below.

Standard Option (Rear tractor or CSF)

To select the displayed paper path, press the ENTER key.

If the paper path is changed when fanfold paper or cut sheet

paper is loaded, the fanfold paper is fed back to the parking

position or the cut sheet paper is ejected.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

F.TR

F.TR

MAN

MAN

MAN

R.TR

CSF

CSF

REAR

TOP

FRNT

TOP

REAR

FRNT

FRNT

TOP

Fanfold paper: Front Rear

Fanfold paper: Front Top

Manual: Front Front

Manual:Front Top

Manual: Front Rear

Fanfold paper: Rear Front

CSF :Rear Front

CSF :Rear Top

EJECT

LOAD PAPER PATH

Fanfold paper, Push tractor

Cut sheet paper, Manual

Cut sheet paper, CSF

PAPER PATH Front

Top

Front

Rear

Front

Front

Rear

Front

Rear

Top

F.TR REAR F.TR TOP

MAN FRNT

F.TR REAR F.TR TOP MAN FRNT

MAN REAR MAN TOP

F.TR REAR F.TR TOP MAN FRNT

CSF TOP MAN TOP

CSF FRNT

♦When no options are installed

♦When the optional CSF is installed

The CSF and rear tractor cannot be used together.

PAPER PATH

TOF SET

3

MAN REAR

♦When the option rear tractors are installed

PAPER & FEED

MAN TOP

R.TR FRNT

MAN REAR

Function Keys 2

●

Control panel operations

●

Control panel operations

2-3

—2. Control panel operations —

4TOF SET (ALT + PAPER PATH keys)

• The TOF SET key is valid only when paper is loaded. When the TOF SET

key is pressed, the current printing position is regarded as the TOF position.

• The TOF ADJUST option on the SETUP MODE specifies the position when

loading paper. The TOF SET key becomes valid after paper has been

loaded.

• If the TOF position is changed when cut sheet paper is used, the changed

TOF position is valid only for the paper already loaded.

• If the EJECT/LOAD key is pressed when fanfold paper is loaded, the paper

is fed back to the parking position. When it is pressed when cut sheet paper

is loaded, the paper is ejected.

• When the EJECT/LOAD key is pressed under the condition where fanfold

paper is at the parking position, the paper is loaded to the TOF position.

• When the EJECT/LOAD key is pressed with no paper in the manual mode,

the key is ignored. When it is pressed with paper loaded in the manual

mode, the printer ejects the paper.

• When the EJECT/LOAD key is pressed with no paper in the CSF mode, the

printer loads paper. When it is pressed with paper loaded in the CSF mode,

the printer ejects the paper.

PAPER PATH

TOF SET

EJECT/LOAD

EJECT/LOAD

QUALITY

5

ALT

QUALITY

EJECT/LOAD

QUALITY

ALT

6

LCD

LQ

NLQ

HQDR

DRAFT

S.D.

S.S.D.

ESC x 1

LQ is selected.

LQ

NLQ

LQ

LQ

S.D.

S.S.D.

ESC x 0

Draft is selected.

Draft

Draft

HQDR

Draft

S.D.

S.S.D.

Normal

High speed 1

High speed 2

High speed 2

High speed 2

High speed 2

Press the QUALITY key to display the currently selected printing quality on

the LCD. Continue to depress the key to display the printing qualities in the

following order.

To select the displayed printing quality, press the ENTER key.

LQ NLQ HQDR

DRAFT

S.D.S.S.D.

The #10 QUALITY menu selected from the SETUP MODE provides

the same functions as the QUALITY key. Priority is given to the last

setting. Thus, if the printing speed is changed on the menu after setting

it with the QUALITY key, the changed printing speed on the menu is

selected.

If "YES" is selected with the QUALITY LOCK option on the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, or "S.D." or "S.S.D." is selected with the

QUALITY option on the SETUP MODE, all software commands for

changing the printing quality are ignored.

If "S.D." is selected, the draft characters are printed at 12 cpi at a speed

1.2 times as high as the normal speed. If "S.S.D." is selected, the

characters are printed at 15 cpi at a speed 1.5 times as high as the

normal speed. When "LQ" is not selected, 180/360/120/240-DPI

graphics are printed at high speed with lower bit density.

(ALT + EJECT/LOAD keys)

(When in the EPSON mode)

Graphic speed

Function Keys 3

2-4 —2. Control panel operations —

7ALT The following functions are executed by pressing the corresponding

key while you press the ALT key.

Press the ONLINE key to change the printing enabled (online) state and

printing disabled (offline) state.

ONLINE ONLINE

8

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

SET UP

EJECT/LOAD

PAPER PATH

TEAR OFF

MICRO LF

MICRO RLF

EXTENDED SET UP

QUALITY

TOF SET

RESET

ENTER

ALT

PAPER FORM

PAPER FORM

9Press the PAPER FORM key to change the format memory for the

currently selected paper path. Each press of the PAPER FORM key

changes the format memory as shown below.

Format memory 1

Format memory 2

Format memory 3

Format memory 4

Format memory 5

Format memory 6

The number of the format memory and the paper size stored in the

format memory are displayed on the LCD.

To select the displayed paper form, press the ENTER key.

13 Press the REVERSE LF key to feed the line in the reverse direction at a

pitch of 1/6 inch.

• Keep the key depressed for continuous reverse line feeding.

REVERSE LF

10 Press the FORM FEED key to feed the page at the currently set page

length.

FORM FEED

(ALT + REVERSE LF keys)

Press the MICRO RLF key to feed the line in the reverse direction at a

pitch of 1/360 inch. (Use this key to adjust the paper position.)

14 MICRO RLF

11 Press the LINE FEED key to feed the line in the forward direction at a

pitch of 1/6 inch.

LINE FEED

(ALT + LINE FEED keys)

Press the MICRO LF key to feed the line in the forward direction at a

pitch of 1/360 inch.

12 MICRO LF

FORM FEED

LINE FEED

MICRO LF

LINE FEED

MICRO LF ALT

REVERSE LF

MICRO RLF

REVERSE LF

MICRO RLF

ALT

●

Control panel operations

Function Keys 4

2-5

—2. Control panel operations —

1.5x

F. TR REAR

F. TR

R. TR

MAN

CSF

: Front Tractor

: Rear Tractor

: Manual

: Cut Sheet Feeder

REAR

TOP

FRNT

: Rear

: Top

: Front

1 inch = 25.4 mm

Paper In Paper Out

15 :

12 :

10 :

5 :

15 inches

12 inches

10 inches

5 inches

Paper Width

(Fanfold Paper)

2

16.5

A3

A4

A5

LT

HLT

LG

EX

GLT

GLG

LD

F4

PC

C6

C10

MN

DL

C5

Page Length (Fanfold Paper)

Paper Size (Cut sheet paper)

1DATA (Green) Blinks while data is transferred. Lights while data is processed except

during communication or when the input buffer contains data. Goes

out in other state.

2ERROR (Amber) ON: No paper is detected or other operational error occurs.

OFF: No error is detected.

Blinking: A functional error has occurred (such as home sense error,

internal RAM error, paper path switching error, head adjustment

error, park error and skew error).

3ONLINE (Green) ON: Printing is enabled.

OFF: Printing is disabled.

Blinking: The cover is open, or the printer is in the head temperature

protect mode.

4POWER (Green) Lights when the printer power is on. Goes out when the printer power

is turned off.

: 2 inches

: 16.5 inches

: A3

: A4

: A5

: LETTER

: HALF LETTER

: LEGAL

: EXECUTIVE

: GOVERNMENT LETTER

: GOVERNMENT LEGAL

: LEDGER

: F4 SIZE

: POST CARD

: COMMERCIAL-6

: COMMERCIAL-10

: MONARCH

: DL Envelope

: C5 Envelope

Page

Length

Paper

Size

1

p :

l :

Orientation

(Cut sheet Paper)

Portrait

Landscape

51

Lamps

●

Control panel operations

Liquid Crystal Display

3.Setup options

3-1

— 3. Setup options —

The setup modes consist of the SETUP MODE and EXTENDED SETUP

MODE.

The SETUP MODE is used to set the parameters that can be saved in

the format memories (memo 1 to memo 6). The EXTENDED SETUP

MODE is used to set other parameters.

●

The following parameters can be set in the SETUP MODE.

:

#1.

MULTIPART (Printing pressure)

#2.

HEAD ADJUSTMENT (Paper thickness adjustment)

#3.

TOF ADJUSTMENT (Top-of-form setting)

#4.

PAGE LENGTH (Page length of fanfold paper or paper size of cut sheet)

#5.

PAPER WIDTH (Fanfold paper)

#6 ~ 9

.

Printing margin setting

#10.

QUALITY (Printing quality)

#11.

FONT SELECT (Font selection)

#12.

CHARACTER PITCH (Character pitch)

#13.

LF PITCH (Line feed pitch)

#14.

ZOOM IN/OUT (Zooming magnification)

#15.

PAPER FASTENER (Paper fastener mode setting)

#16.

PERFORATION (Perforation head-up mode setting)

#17.

FANFOLD FEED (Fanfold feed setting)

#18.

PAPER QUALITY

#19.

SELECT SAVE MEMORY (Memo 1 to memo 6)

#20.

SELECT LOAD MEMORY (Memo 1 to memo 6)

●

The following parameters can be set in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

:

Menus #20 to #95 are used mainly to set the following

parameters:

Emulation, font, paper handling, interface, bar codes,

enlarged characters.

●

Entering the SETUP MODE

:

Press the SET UP key to enter the SETUP MODE. To

quit the SETUP MODE, press the EXIT key.

●

Entering the EXTENDED SETUP MODE

:

Press the SET UP key and ALT key simultaneously to

enter the EXTENDED SETUP MODE. To quit the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, press the EXIT key. The

printer is initialized automatically.

While data is input, the printer can enter the panel setup mode only

in the OFFLINE state.

The printer has setup modes, i.e., function setting modes that are unique to this

printer. The setup modes enable various printer functions to be set up with the

function keys on the operation panel.

This section provides an the outline of the setup modes and the details of the setup

functions.

Available functions in the setup modes

Entering the setup modes

Outline of the setup modes

The keys shown below are used in the setup modes.

●

Operations in the setup modes

3-2 — 3. Setup options —

Keys used for setting

DATA ERROR ONLINE POWER

TEAR OFF ONLINE

FORM FEED

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

TOF SET

QUALITY

PAPER FORM

RESET

SET UP

MICRO LF

MICRO RLF

EXIT

EXTENDED

ENTER

ALT

FORM

11. x 5

IN OUT

F.TR EAR

1

2

3

4

EJECT/LOAD

PAPER PATH

PAPER PATH

R511

Item selection keys

(Used with the LINE FEED or

REVERSE LF key.)

These keys are used to select items displayed

vertically in a menu. They change only the

display and do not change the setting.

ENTER key

To register a displayed menu item, press the

ENTER key. When the ENTER key is

pressed, the selected item is registered in the

printer and marked with an asterisk (*), and

the menu reappears.

EXIT key

Press the EXIT key to exit the panel setup

mode.

1

4

3

2

Menu selection keys

(Used with the EJECT/LOAD or

FORM FEED key.)

These keys are used to change the displayed

menus. They change only the display and do not

change the setting.

The menus is changed rapidly when the or

key is depressed and held for a second or

more.

●

Operations in the setup modes

The following example shows how to select "OPTION: CSF" in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

1. Press SET UP key while depressing the

ALT key.

2. Select #60 OPTION with the or key.

3. Press the key to display "OPTION: CSF"

on the LCD.

4. Press the ENTER key.

"CSF" is marked with an asterisk, indicating that the CSF is

selected.

5. Press the EXIT key. The setting is

automatically saved, and the printer is

initialized.

3-3

— 3. Setup options —

Setting example in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE

SET UP

20. EMULATION

ALT

F. TR REAR 11 x 15

ENTER

60. OPTION

NOT INSTALL*

OPTION: CSF

OPTION: CSF

OPTION: CSF *

20. EMULATION

INITIAL

60. OPTION

F. TR REAR 11 x 15 INITIAL

EXIT

60. OPTION

60. OPTION

NOT INSTALL*

In the SETUP MODE, after pressing the EXIT key select SAVE

YES by the or key and press the ENTER key. If SAVE

NO is selected, any changes made in the SETUP MODE are

erased when the printer power is turned off.

●

Setup mode summary(1)

3-4 — 3. Setup options —

NORMAL*

DARK 1

DARK 2

AUTO

15 INCH *

12 INCH

10 INCH

5 INCH

MULTIPART

1

5

PAPER WIDTH

(INCH SIZE)

+ n LINE

0 ≤ n ≤ 15

n=0*

TOP MARGIN

6

QUALITY

10

LQ *

NLQ

HQDR

DRAFT

S.D.

S.S.D.

FONT SELECT

11

ROMAN *

SANS SERIF

COURIER

PRESTIGE

SCRIPT

OCR-B

OCR-A

GOTHIC

ORATOR

ORATOR-S

SELECT SAVE

MEMORY

19

MEMO 1

MEMO 2

MEMO 3

MEMO 4

MEMO 5

MEMO 6

SETUP MODE

EPSON *

IBM

HP

EMULATION

20

CHARACTER

TABLE(IBM)

CHAR. SET 1*

CHAR. SET 2

23

CHARACTER

TABLE(EPSON)

21 24

EXTENDED SETUP MODE

ITALIC *

GRAPHIC

DOWNLOAD

CODE PAGE

USA *

FRANCE

GERMANY

U.K.

DENMARK

SWEDEN

ITALY

SPAIN

JAPAN

NORWAY

DENMARK2

SPAIN2

LATIN AMERICA

KOREA

TURKEY

LEGAL

CODE PAGE

25

AGM

(IBM)

26

NO *

YES

34

ZERO STYLE

30

NO-SLASHED *

SLASHED

TABULATION

31

2CHAR.

4 CHAR.

6 CHAR.

8 CHAR. *

10 CHAR.

12 CHAR.

FONT LOCK

33

NO *

YES

PITCH LOCK

NO *

YES

MEMO 1

MEMO 2

MEMO 3

MEMO 4

MEMO 5

MEMO 6

SELECT LOAD

MEMORY

20

7

+ n LINE

0 ≤ n ≤ 15

n=0*

BOTTOM

MARGIN

8

+ n COLUMN

0 ≤ n ≤ 63

n=0*

LEFT MARGIN

9

+ n COLUMN

0 ≤ n ≤ 63

n=0*

RIGHT

MARGIN

CHARACTER

TABLE (HP)

22

ROMAN-8 *

CODE PAGE

PC-8 DEN/NOR

LEGAL

SWEDEN 1

SWEDEN 2

SPAIN 1

FRANCE 1

GERMAN 1

U.K.

PORTGAL 1

NORWAY 1

NORWAY 2

IRV

ITALY

FRANCE 2

GERMAN 2

SPAIN 2

SPAIN 3

JAPAN

PORTGAL 2

27

CR SETTING

CR ONLY *

CR + LF

AUTOFEED

SIMPLE*

COMPO.

ACCENT CHR

29

LF ONLY

LF+CR *

LF SETTING

28

10 CPI *

12 CPI

15 CPI

16.7 CPI

17.1 CPI

20 CPI

24 CPI

PROPORTIONAL

CHARACTER

PITCH

12

141 %

200 %

400 %

600 %

800 %

1000%

1200 %

1400 %

1600 %

NATIONAL

FONT

TOF

ADJUSTMENT

TOP OF FORM

+ n/60 INCH

0 ≤ n ≤ 63

n=14*

3

AUTO: n CLICK

-2 ≤ n ≤ 5

FIX : n CLICK

-5 ≤ n ≤ 25

HEAD

ADJUSTMENT

2

AUTO 0 CLICK*

4

2

2.5

3

3.5

4

4.5

5

5.5

6

6.5

7

7.5

8

8.5

9

9.5

10

10.5

11 *

11.5

A3 p

A3 l

A4 p *

A4 l

A5 p

A5 l

LEDGER p

F4 p

F4 l

EXECUTIVE p

EXECUTIVE l

G.LETTER p

G.LETTER l

G.LEGAL p

G.LEGAL l

POST CARD p

POST CARD l

COM-6 p

12

12.5

13

13.5

14

14.5

15

15.5

16

16.5

COM-6 l

COM-10 p

COM-10 l

MONARCH p

MONARCH l

DL p

DL l

C5 p

C5 l

PAGE

LENGTH

INCH SIZE

REGULAR SIZE

LETTER p

LETTER l

H.LETTER p

H.LETTER l

LEGAL p

LEGAL l

PAGE LENGTH

LOCK

32

NO *

YES

437 *

850

857

858

860

861

863

865

BRASCII

ABICOMP

ISO8859-1

The astarisk (*) indicates

the factory default setting.

LF PITCH

13

6 LPI *

8 LPI

9 LPI

3 LPI

4 LPI

ZOOM IN/OUT

14

66 %

79 %

83 %

91 %

100 %*

116 %

120 %

15

PAPER

FASTENER

YES

NO *

FASTENER

16

PERFORA-

TION

HEAD LIFT

UP

YES

NO *

17

FANFOLD

FEED

FRICTION

YES *

NO

18

PAPER

QUALITY

GOOD

NO GOOD*

●

Setup mode summary(2)

3-5

— 3. Setup options —

73

EXTENDED SETUP MODE

1

0*

I/F

SELECT IN

ENABLE

71

STOP BIT

1 BIT *

2 BITS

74

SERIAL ERROR

77

PRINT "*" *

IGNORED

CTS ENABLE

78

NO *

YES

92

NO *

YES

DATA LATCH

TIMING

83

TYPE F. *

TYPE R.

PARALLEL *

SERIAL

AUTO

INTERFACE

70

PARITY BIT

NON *

EVEN

ODD

72

DATA LENGTH

8 BITS*

7 BITS

PROTOCOL

DTR*

XON/XOFF 1

XON/XOFF 2

ETX/ACK

75

CD ENABLE

79

NO *

YES

DSR ENABLE

80

NO *

YES

BUFFER SIZE

81

512KB*

8KB

128B

BUSY/ACK

TIMING

82

TYPE 1

TYPE 2 *

TYPE 3

PRINT

DIRECTION

90

PRE-DIRECTION

UNI-DIRECTION

BI-DIRECTION *

93

RESET KEY

LOCK

NO *

YES

SLEEP MODE

94

YES *

NO

QUALITY

LOCK

35

CHR TBL

LOCK

36

BARCODE/

ENLARGED CHAR

40

MODE 1 *

MODE 2

IGNORED

41

INDSTRIAL 2OF5

INTERLEAVED 2OF5

MATRIX 2OF5

CODABAR

CODE11

NO *

YES

NO *

YES

FF CODE

AT TOF

37

GRAPHIC

QUALITY

38

MODE 1

MODE 2 *

MODE 3

YES *

NO

AUTO SCROLL

62

NO SCROLL *

0.5 SEC

1 SEC

5 SEC

10 SEC

15 SEC

BARCODE

TYPE CODE39 *

CODE93

CODE128

EAN8

EAN13

UPC-A

UPC-E

POSTNET

ELEMENT

LARGE

CHAR. SIZE

43

SOFTWARE

SETUP

44

VALID *

IGNORED 1

IGNORED 2

SIZE: 1

SIZE: 2

SIZE: 4

SIZE: 8 *

SIZE: 12

SIZE: 16

SIZE: 24

SIZE: 32

BARCODE

SIZE

42

SIZE: 1 *

SIZE: 1.5

SIZE: 2

SIZE: 2.5

OPTION

60

PAPER PATH

61

NOT INSTALLED *

CSF

REAR TRACTOR

F.TR. ->REAR *

F.TR. ->TOP

MANUAL->FRONT

MANUAL->TOP

MANUAL->REAR

R.TR.->FRONT

CSF->FRONT

CSF->TOP

PAPER JAM

DETECTION

65

YES *

NO

P.OUT

DETECTION

63

YES *

NO

LF SPEED

66

NORMAL *

1/2

1/3

AUTO SCROLL

POSITION

67

ANY POS *

TOF ONLY

SKEW

DETECTION

64

YES *

NO

CHR TB2 HP

51

LINE-DRAW *

MATH-7

PCL MODE

50

PCL3 + *

PCL3

PCL3 + D

DISPLAY

LANGUAGE

91

ENGLISH *

DEUTSCH

FRANCAIS

ESPANOL

ITALIANO

38400 BPS

19200 BPS

9600 BPS*

4800 BPS

2400 BPS

1200 BPS

600 BPS

300 BPS

BAUD RATE

76

KEY

LOCK

ERROR

STATUS

YES *

NO

84

SETUP MENU

LIST

95

PATH & FORM

EXTEND

ALL SETUP

Printing Factory Default Setting Page

#01 : MULTIPART ➞ NORMAL 3-8

#02 : HEAD ADJUSTMENT ➞ AUTO 0 CLICK 3-9

#15 : PAPER FASTENER NO 3-22

#16 : PERFORATION NO 3-22

#17 : FANFOLD FEED YES 3-23

#18 : PAPER QUALITY NOT GOOD 3-23

#66 : LF SPEED NORMAL 3-44

Form selection

#61 : PAPER PATH ➞ F.Tr.->REAR 3-40

Character

#10 : QUALITY ➞ LQ 3-17

#11 : FONT SELECT ➞ ROMAN 3-18

#12 : CHARACTER PITCH ➞ 10CPI 3-19

#21 : CHARACTER TABLE (HP) ➞ ROMAN-8 3-25

#22 : CHARACTER TABLE (EPSON) ➞ ITALIC 3-26

#23 : CHARACTER TABLE (IBM) ➞ SET 1 3-26

#24 : NATIONAL FONT (EPSON) ➞ U.S.A. 3-27

#25 : CODE PAGE ➞ 437 3-28

#26 : AGM (Alternate Graphics Mode) (IBM) ➞ NO 3-28

#29 : ACCENT CHR ➞ SIMPLE 3-30

#30 : ZERO STYLE ➞ NO SLASHED 3-30

#38 : GRAPHIC QUALITY ➞ MODE2 3-35

#51 : CHRACTER TABLE 2 (HP) ➞ LINE DRAW 3-41

Zooming

#14 : ZOOM IN/OUT ➞ 100% 3-21

Printing start position and printing area

#03 : TOF ADJUSTMENT ➞ 14/60 inch 3-10

#04 : PAGE LENGTH ➞ (Memo1

~

3)11inch (Memo4

~

6)A4 p 3-11

#05 : PAPER WIDTH ➞ (Memo1

~

3)15 inch (Memo4

~

6)10inch 3-12

#06 : TOP MARGIN ➞ 0 LINE 3-13

#07 : BOTTOM MARGIN ➞ 0 LINE 3-14

#08 : LEFT MARGIN ➞ 0 COL 3-15

#09 : RIGHT MARGIN ➞ 0 COL 3-16

Line feed and carriage return

#13 : LF PITCH ➞ 6 LPI 3-20

#27 : CR SETTING ➞ CR ONLY 3-29

#28 : LF SETTING ➞ LF + CR 3-29

#31 : TABULATION ➞ 8 CHAR 3-31

#37 : FF CODE AT TOF ➞ YES 3-34

#90 : PRINT DIRECTION ➞ BI-DIRECTION 3-55

●

Factory default setting

3-6 — 3. Setup options —

aa

A

A

Lock function Factory Default Setting Page

#32 : PAGE LENGTH LOCK ➞ NO 3-31

#33 : FONT LOCK ➞ NO 3-32

#34 : PITCH LOCK ➞ NO 3-32

#35 : QUALITY LOCK ➞ NO 3-33

#36 : CHARACTER TABLE LOCK ➞ NO 3-33

#92 : KEY LOCK ➞ NO 3-56

#93 : RESET KEY LOCK ➞ NO 3-56

Bar code and enlarged character

#40 : BARCODE/ENLARGED CHARACTER ➞ MODE 1 3-36

#41 : BARCODE TYPE ➞ CODE 39 3-37

#42 : BARCODE SIZE ➞ 1 3-39

#43 : ENLARGED CHARACTER SIZE ➞ 8 3-39

Operation condition

#19 : SELECT SAVE MEMORY ➞ MEMO 1 3-24

#20 : SELECT LOAD MEMORY ➞ MEMO 1 3-24

#20 : EMULATION ➞ EPSON 3-25

#44 : SETUP COMMAND ➞ VALID 3-40

#50 : PCL MODE (HP) ➞ PCL 3+ 3-40

#60 : OPTION ➞ NOT INSTALL 3-41

#62 : AUTO SCROLL ➞ NO SCROLL 3-42

#63 : P.OUT DETECTION ➞ YES 3-43

#64 : SKEW DETECTION ➞ YES 3-43

#65 : PAPER JAM ➞ YES 3-44

#67 : AUTO SCROLL POSITION ➞ ANY POS 3-45

#91 : DISPLAY LANGUAGE ➞ ENGLISH 3-55

#94 : SLEEP MODE ➞ YES 3-57

#95 : SETUP MENU LIST ➞ PATH & FORM 3-57

Interface condition

#70 : INTERFACE ➞ PARALLEL 3-46

#71 : SELECT IN ENABLE ➞ 0 3-47

#72 : PARITY BIT (SERIAL I/F) ➞ NON 3-47

#73 : DATA LENGTH (SERIAL I/F) ➞ 8 BITS 3-48

#74 : STOP BIT (SERIAL I/F) ➞ 1 BIT 3-48

#75 : PROTOCOL (SERIAL I/F) ➞ DTR 3-49

#76 : BAUD RATE (SERIAL I/F) ➞ 9600 B 3-49

#77 : SERIAL ERROR (SERIAL I/F) ➞ PRINT 3-50

#78 : CTS ENABLE (SERIAL I/F) ➞ NO 3-50

#79 : CD ENABLE (SERIAL I/F) ➞ NO 3-51

#80 : DSR ENABLE (SERIAL I/F) ➞ NO 3-51

#81 :

BUFFER SIZE

➞ 64KB 3-52

#82 : BUSY/ACK TIMING (PARALLEL I/F) ➞ TYPE 2 3-53

#83 : DATA LATCH TIMING (PARALLEL I/F) ➞ TYPE F. 3-53

#84 : ERROR STATUS (PARALLEL I/F) ➞ YES 3-54

●

Factory default setting

3-7

— 3. Setup options —

Printing capabilities on multipart paper are selectable as shown below.

Multipart

3-8 — 3. Setup options —

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84

Function

#01

1 MULTIPART

COPY: NORMAL

COPY: DARK 1

COPY: DARK 2

COPY: AUTO

Supplementary notes

This function improves the printing capability on

multipart paper.

Use multipart paper consisting of an original plus eight non-

carbon sheets or copying paper up to 0.59 mm thick.

Setting procedures

#90 ~ #95

LCD display LQ Draft

NORMAL ORIGINAL + 5 ORIGINAL + 4

DARK1 ORIGINAL + 7 ORIGINAL + 7

DARK1 ORIGINAL + 8 ORIGINAL + 8

AUTO Automatically swiches Normal, Dark 1, or Dark 2 according

to the paper thickness.

3-9

— 3. Setup options —

Head adjustment

Function

#02 This function adjusts the gap between the print head

and platen.

This function has FIX and AUTO modes: The gap is fixed in the

FIX mode, and the gap is automatically adjusted in the AUTO

mode.

2 HEAD ADJUST

FIX : n CLICK

AUTO : n CLICK

-2 < n < +5

-5 < n < +25

DEFAULT : AUTO : 0 CLICK

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

Setting procedures

#90 ~ #95

In the AUTO mode,

the gap is

automatically

adjusted every time

fanfold paper or

manually-inserted paper is

loaded. When CSF is used,

automatic paper thickness

adjustment is performed

when the paper is first

loaded. Thereafter,

automatic paper thickness

adjustment is performed

when the next sheet is fed

if printing is not performed

within 3 to 4 seconds after

the paper is ejected.

The smaller the number, the

smaller the gap between the

head and platen.

Ream weight: 55 to 90 kg

Ream weight: 90 to 135 kg

Ream weight: 180 kg

Postcard

Total paper thickness (mm)

-1 ~ 1

0.08 0.16 0.24 0.32 0.4 0.48 0.56 0.64 0.72

0.16 0.24 0.32 0.4 0.48 0.56 0.64 0.72 0.8

(Paper

weight

: 34 kg)

1~ 3 3~ 5 5 ~ 77~ 9 9~ 11 11~ 13 13~ 15 15~ 17

Paper type/fixed click position

Cut

sheet

Multipart

paper

2sheets

3sheets

4sheets

5sheets

6sheets

7sheets

8sheets

9sheets

#60 ~ #67

Every click changes the gap by 0.04 mm.

The recommended gap for 70 kg 1P paper is at the 0 click

position in the FIX mode.

●AUTO mode

In the AUTO mode, the gap between the print head and

platen is automatically adjusted according to the paper

thickness. Since the most appropriate gap differs with the

type of paper, select the proper position between -2 and +5

according to the printing results.

●FIX mode

The gap between the print head and platen is fixed as

specified.

Select the proper position according to the paper type and

thickness by referring to the table below.

Supplementary notes

The TOF position is adjusted in units of 1/60 inch. It can be

adjusted between 0/60 inch (minimum) and 63/60 inches

(maximum) from the end of paper.

TOF adjustment

3-10 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#03

3 TOF ADJUST

TOP: + n /60 IN The value may be changed with the and keys.

0 ≤ n ≤ 63

DEFAULT : n=14

This function specifies the top of form (TOF)

position.

When paper is loaded, the printer detects the end of the paper and

determines the printing start position based on the detected paper

end. That position is the top of the form (TOF).

Setting procedures

Supplementary notes

Though the TOF position can be set from 0/60

inch (0 mm), paper may jam if it is set to a

value between 0/60 inch to 9/60 inch. Normally, it is

recommended that the TOF position be set to 14/60 inch

(approximately 6 mm) from the paper end.

Caution

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-11

— 3. Setup options —

Page length

Function

#04 This function specifies the page length of the form

to be used.

Thirty types of page lengths, from 2 to 16.5 inches in 0.5 inch steps,

plus seventeen standard sizes are available as shown below.

When fanfold paper is used, the page length set here is used to define

the perforation.

The printer loads paper, it regards the end of the paper as the

perforation. The TOF (top-of-form) position is determined from the

end of the paper based on a preset TOF value.

4 PAGE LENGTH

PAGE: 2 IN

PAGE: 2.5 IN

PAGE: 3 IN

PAGE: 3.5 IN

PAGE: 4 IN

PAGE: 4.5 IN

PAGE: 5 IN

PAGE: 5.5 IN

PAGE: 6 IN

PAGE: 6.5 IN

PAGE: 7 IN

PAGE: 7.5 IN

PAGE: 8 IN

PAGE: 8.5 IN

PAGE: 11 IN

PAGE: 9 IN

PAGE: 9.5 IN

PAGE: 10 IN

PAGE: 10.5 IN

PAGE: 11.5 IN

PAGE: 12 IN

PAGE: 12.5 IN

PAGE: 13 IN

PAGE: 13.5IN

PAGE: 14 IN

PAGE: 14.5 IN

PAGE: 15 IN

PAGE: 15.5 IN

PAGE: 16 IN

PAGE: 16.5 IN

SIZE: A3 p

SIZE: A3 l

SIZE: A4 l

SIZE: A5 p

SIZE: A5 l

SIZE: G.LETTER p

SIZE: G.LETTER l

SIZE: EXECUT p

SIZE: EXECUT l

SIZE: LETTER p

SIZE: LETTER l

SIZE: H.LETTER p

SIZE: H.LETTER l

SIZE: LEGAL p

SIZE: LEGAL l

SIZE: F4 l

SIZE: POST C. p

SIZE: POST C. l

SIZE: LEDGER p

SIZE: F4 p

SIZE: G.LEGAL p

SIZE: G.LEGAL l

SIZE: COM-6 p

SIZE: COM-6 l

SIZE: COM-10 p

SIZE: COM-10 l

SIZE: MONARCH p

SIZE: MONARCH l

SIZE: DL p

SIZE: DL l

SIZE: C5 p

SIZE: C5 l

SIZE: A4 p

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

If the PAGE LENGTH

LOCK option is set to

NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE, the

page length can be

changed by a software

command. The values

available on the menu

serve as the default

values. If the PAGE

LENGTH LOCK option

is set to YES in the

EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, any software

command to change the

page length is ignored.

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

The following table shows the relationship between the paper width

settings in inches and the number of columns printable on each line,

when characters are printed at 10 cpi.

Paper width

3-12 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#05

5 PAPER WIDTH

WIDTH : 15 IN

WIDTH : 12 IN

WIDTH : 10 IN

WIDTH : 5 IN

Supplementarynotes

This function specifies the width of fanfold paper.

This function specifies the width of fanfold paper in inches.

Setting procedures

Display Paper width Max. columns/line

15 IN 15 inches 136

12 IN 12 inches 106

10 IN 10 inches 80

5 IN 5 inches 36

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-13

— 3. Setup options —

Top margin

Function

#06 This function specifies the length of the area at the top

of the paper where printing is disabled in units of 6 LPI

from the TOF position.

6 TOP MARGIN

T.M. : 0 LINE

n = 0 ~ 15

T.M. : 15 LINE

Setting procedures

Supplementary notes

The top margin is specified in units of 6 LPI (lines per inch)

within the range from 0 (minimum) to 15 (maximum) from the

TOF position.

0/60 to 63/60 inches

(#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT on SETUP MENU)

0/60 to 63/60 inches

(#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT on SETUP MENU)

TOF

TOF

TOF

0 to 15 lines

(#6 TOP MARGIN on SETUP MENU)

0 to 15 lines

(#6 TOP MARGIN on SETUP MENU)

Printable area when top

margin is specified.

Printable area when top

margin is specified.

Printable area when top

margin is specified.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

The bottom margin of fanfold paper is specified in units of 6

LPI (lines per inch) within the range from 0 to 15 from the

TOF position of the following page.

The bottom margin of cut sheet paper is specified within the

range from 0 to 15 from the bottom of the printable area.

Bottom margin

3-14 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#07 This function specifies the length of the area at the

bottom of the paper where printing is disabled in units

of 6 LPI from the TOF position of the following page.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

7 BOTTOM MARGIN

B.M. : 0 LINE

n = 0 ~ 15

B.M. : 15 LINE

TOF

TOF

TOF

4 mm

0/60 to 63/60 inches

(#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT on SETUP MENU)

0 to 15 lines

(#7 BOTTOM MARGIN on SETUP MENU)

0 to 15 lines

(#7 BOTTOM MARGIN on SETUP MENU)

Printable area when

bottom margin is specified.

Printable area when

bottom margin is

specified.

Printable area when

bottom margin is

specified.

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-15

— 3. Setup options —

The left margin is specified by the number of columns (1/10")

within the range from 0 to 63 columns from the left end of the

printable area as shown below.

Left margin

Function

#08

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

This function specifies the length of the area on the left

side of the paper where printing is disabled from the

left end of the printable area.

8 LEFT MARGIN

L.M. : 0 COL

n = 0 ~ 63

L.M. : 63 COL

Printable area

when left margin

is specified.

Printable area

when left margin

is specified.

Printable area

when left margin

is specified.

0 to 63 characters 0 to 63 characters

(#8 LEFT MARGIN on SETUP MENU) (#8 LEFT MARGIN on SETUP

MENU)

Left end of printable area Left end of printable area

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

The right margin by specified in the number of columns

(1/10") within the range from 0 to 63 from the right end of the

printable area as shown below.

3-16 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#09 This function specifies the length of the area on the

right side of the paper where printing is disabled from

the right end of the printable area.

Setting procedures

Right margin

9 RIGHT MARGIN

R.M. : 0 COL

n = 0 ~ 63

R.M. : 63 COL

Supplementary notes

Right end of printable areaRight end of printable area

Printable area

when right margin

is specified.

0 to 63 characters 0 to 63 characters

(#9 RIGHT MARGIN on SETUP

MENU) (#9 RIGHT MARGIN on SETUP

MENU)

Printable area

when right

margin

is specified.

Printable area

when right

margin

is specified.

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-17

— 3. Setup options —

Character quality

Function

#10 This function specifies character quality.

This option has the same function as the QUALITY key (i.e.,

EJECT/LOAD key while depressing ALT key). Priority is given to

the most recent setting made with the QUALITY key or in the

SETUP MODE.

When "LQ" is not selected, 180/36/120/240-dpi graphics are

printed at high speed with lower bit density.

10 QUALITY

QLTY: LQ

QLTY: NLQ

QLTY: DRAFT

QLTY: S.D.

QLTY: S.S.D

QLTY: HQDR

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

QUALITY Graphic speed

LQ Normal

NLQ High speed 1

HQDR High speed 2

DRAFT High speed 2

S. D. High speed 2

S. S. D. High speed 2

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Setting procedures

Supplementary notes

Character font

3-18 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#11 This function specifies the typeface of the font

characters.

The following ten fonts are available: Roman, Sans Serif,

Courier, Prestige, Script, OCR-B, OCR-A, Gothic, Orator, and

Orator-s.

FONT : ROMAN

FONT : S. SERIF

FONT : COURIER

FONT : PRESTIGE

FONT : SCRIPT

FONT : OCR-B

FONT : OCR-A

FONT : GOTHIC

FONT : ORATOR

FONT : ORATORs

11 FONT SELECT

If the FONT LOCK option is set to NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE, the font can be changed by a software

command. The font selected on the menu serves as the

default font.

If the FONT LOCK option is set to YES in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE, the currently selected font cannot be

changed by a software command.

Font Printing sample

ROMAN

SANS SERIF

COURIER

PRESTIGE

SCRIPT

OCR-B

OCR-A

GOTHIC

ORATOR

ORATOR-S

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

If the PITCH LOCK option is set to NO in the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, the character pitch can be changed by a software

command. The pitch selected on the menu serves as the default

pitch.

If the PITCH LOCK option is set to YES in the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, the currently selected pitch cannot be changed by a

software command.

3-19

— 3. Setup options —

Character pitch

Function

#12

PITCH : 10 CPI

12 CHARACTER PICH

PITCH : 12 CPI

PITCH : 15 CPI

PITCH : 20 CPI

PITCH : 24CPI

PITCH : 16.7 CPI PITCH : PROP.

PITCH : 17.1 CPI

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

This function specifies the character pitch.

The available pitches are: 10 cpi, 12 cpi, 15 cpi, 16,7 cpi, 17.1 cpi,

20 cpi, 24 cpi, and proportional.

Character pitch Printing sample

10 cpi

12 cpi

15 cpi

16.7 cpi

17.1 cpi

20 cpi

24 cpi

LQ Proprtional

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Line feed pitch

3-20 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#13 This function specifies the line feed pitch as shown

below.

LF: 6 LPI...... 1/6

inch pitch

LF: 3 LPI...... 1/3

inch pitch

LF: 8 LPI...... 1/8

inch pitch

LF: 4 LPI...... 1/4

inch pitch

LF: 9 LPI...... 1/9

inch pitch (LPI = Line Per Inch)

13 LF PITCH

LF: 6 LPI

LF: 8 LPI

LF: 9 LPI

LF: 3 LPI

LF: 4 LPI

Setting procedures

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-21

— 3. Setup options —

Documents are enlarged or reduced vertically and

horizontally by the degree of magnification specified with this

function. The following shows the frequently-used

magnifications for reference.

Enlarging/Reducing print

Function

#14

14 ZOOM IN/OUT

ZOOM OUT: 66 %

NO ZOOM: 100 %

ZOOM IN : 116 %

ZOOM OUT: 79 %

ZOOM OUT: 83 %

ZOOM OUT: 91 %

ZOOM IN: 600 %

ZOOM IN: 400 %

ZOOM IN: 200 %

ZOOM IN: 141 %

ZOOM IN: 120 % ZOOM IN: 800 %

ZOOM IN: 1000 %

ZOOM IN: 1200 %

ZOOM IN: 1400 %

ZOOM IN: 1600 %

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

This function specifies the magnification enlargement

(zoom in) or reduction (zoom out).

It can enlarge or reduce data as needed according to the form size.

It is used, for example, to print documents prepared for the A4

paper on A3 paper.

66% 83%

116% 141%

A3 A4 A4 EXECUTIVE

EXECUTIVE(p) A4(p) A4(p) A3(p)

ZOOM OUT

ZOOM IN

(p)

(P) : Portrait

(Enlargement)

(Reduction)

The magnification displayed on the LCD has some

allowance. Enlarged or reduced characters are printed in a

different font from the specified font.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Paper fastener mode setting

3-22 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#15 This function sets the mode for stable paper feeding with

multipart fanfold paper bound by paper fasteners.

When the multipart fanfold paper is bound by paper fasteners or

paper staples rather than glue, paper slippage or paper jam error

may occur. When paper is fed while the print head is stopped on a

paper fastener, the fastener will become a load and normal paper

feeding will be disabled. When YES is selected, the print head does

not stop on a paper fastener.

Perforation head-up mode setting

Function

#16 This setting is effective when the perforation peak exceeds the

range which permits normal paper feeding.

When the perforation peak of the paper which is spread on a flat

surface is 1.0 mm or more, paper slippage or paper jam error may

occur. This will result in a stress when the printi head passes over

the perforation, and normal paper feeding will be disabled.

When YES is selected, the gap between the print head and the

platen is widen while the paper is feeding within 0.5 inch of the

perforation.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

15 PAPER FASTENER

FASTENER MODE : YES

FASTENER MODE : NO

16 PERFORATION

HEAD LIFT UP : YES

HEAD LIFT UP : NO

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-23

— 3. Setup options —

When the binding method of a multipart form is different on

the left and right sides, the friction rollers should be set to be

not used (FRICTION: NO).

Fanfold feed setting

Function

#17

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

This setting specifies whether or not to also use the friction

rollers when feeding fanfold paper.

When multipart forms are used, the friction rollers should be set to

be used (FRICTION: YES). When the thin single fanfold paper is

used, the friction rollers should be set to be not used (FRICTION:

NO).

17 FANFOLD FEED

FRICTION : YES

FRICTION : NO

Selection of paper quality

Function

#18

Setting procedures

The paper quality is selected.

Select the paper quality according to the condition of the paper

edge.

When the paper edge is bent or curled over after printing, select

"Paper quality : Bad". In this case, after inserting the paper, it is

necessary to straighten the paper edge.

18 PAPER QUALITY

QUALITY : NO GOOD

QUALITY : GOOD

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Format memory

The format memory saves six setup parameters. Optional

setup parameters can be saved in the memory and

loaded on the printer. If different formats are specified

and saved in the memory, you can change setup

parameters by using the format memory.

Saving data in format memory

3-24 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#19

19 SAVE MEMO

SAVE : MEMO 3

SAVE : MEMO 4

SAVE : MEMO 5

SAVE : MEMO 6

SAVE : MEMO 1

SAVE : MEMO 2

This function writes the data of the format memory

currently in use to the specified memo.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

Loading data from format memory

Function

#20

LOAD : MEMO 1

20 LOAD MEMO

LOAD : MEMO 2

LOAD : MEMO 3

LOAD : MEMO 4

LOAD : MEMO 5

LOAD : MEMO 6

This function reads data from the specified format

memory into the format memory currently in use.

The user can exchange data in the format memory with data in any of

the following memos: memo 1 to memo 6.

Setting procedures

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-25

— 3. Setup options —

Emulation

Function

#20

Setting procedures

The printer has three types of emulations shown below.

Emulation compatible with the EPSON LQ-2550 TM

Emulation compatible with the IBM 2391™

Emulation compatible with the Hewlett Packard

Rugged Writer 480 TM (PCL3) TM

20 EMULATION

EML : EPSON

EML : IBM

Selecting emulation EPSON

Selecting emulation IBM

EML : HP Selecting emulation HP

Character table (HP)

Function

#21 Setting procedures

This function specifies the character table used in the

HP mode.

21 CHR TB HP

TBL : ROMAN-8

TBL : CODE PG

TBL : PC-8D/N

TBL : LEGAL

TBL : SWEDEN 1

TBL : SWEDEN 2

TBL : FRANC 1

TBL : GERMN 1

TBL : U. K.

TBL : PORTU 1

TBL : NORWAY 1

TBL : NORWAY 2

TBL : ITALY

TBL : FRANC 2

TBL : GERMN 2

TBL : SPAIN 2

TBL : SPAIN 3

TBL : JAPAN

TBL : PORTU 2

TBL : IRV

TBL : SPAIN 1

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

SET1 Character set 1

SET2 Character set 2

Character table (IBM)

3-26 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#23

23 CHR TB IBM

TBL: SET 1

TBL: SET 2

This function specifies the character table used in the

IBM mode.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

The values specified here serve as the default values.

Supplementary notes

Character table (EPSON)

Function

#22 Setting procedures

This function specifies the character table used in the

EPSON mode.

22 CHR TB EPSON

TBL : ITALIC

TBL : GRAPHIC

TBL : DOWN LD

TBL : CODE PG

ITALIC Italic table

GRAPHIC Extended graphic table

DOWN LD Download table

CODE PG Code page

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-27

— 3. Setup options —

These national fonts are not applicable to the IBM or HP mode.

The following table shows the national fonts.

National font (EPSON)

Function

#24

24 NATIONAL FONT

CNTRY: USA

CNTRY: FRANCE

CNTRY: GERMANY

CNTRY: U.K.

CNTRY: DENMRK

CNTRY: SWEDEN

CNTRY: ITALY

CNTRY: SPAIN

CNTRY: JAPAN

CNTRY: NORWAY

CNTRY: DNMRK 2

CNTRY: SPAIN 2

CNTRY: LATN AM

CNTRY: KOREA

CNTRY: TURKEY

CNTRY: LEGAL

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

The printer has sixteen national fonts as shown below:

U.S.A., France, Germany, U.K., Denmark, Sweden, Italy, Spain, Japan,

Norway, Denmark 2, Spain 2, Latin America, Korea, Turkey, and Legal

23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

U.S.A.

France

Germany

U.K.

Denmark

Sweden

Italy

Spain

Japan

Norway

Denmark

2

Spain

2

Latin America

Korea

Turkey

Legal

If some specific characters are printed in a font of another

nation, the code page or national font may be specified

improperly. Refer to the manual of the computer or

application software used. Use great care with software

produced in other countries.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Code page

3-28 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#25

C.P.: 437

C.P.: 850

C.P.: 857

C.P.: 858

C.P.: 860

25 CODE PAGE

C.P.: 863

C.P.: 861

C.P.: 865

C.P.: BRASCII

C.P.: ABICOMP

C.T.: ISO-1

The printer has eleven code pages shown below:

(1) Code page 437: U.S.A.

(2) Code page 850: Multilingual

(3) Code page 857: Turkey

(4) Code page 858: Multilingual (EURO symbol)

(5) Code page 860: Portugal

(6) Code page 861: Icelandic

(7) Code page 863: Canadian-French

(8) Code page 865: Norway

(9) Code page Brascii

(10) Code page Abicomp

(11) ISO-1: Western Europe, ISO-8859-1

Alternate graphics mode (AGM) (IBM)

Function

#26

AGM : NO

AGM : YES

26 AGM IBM

AGM is invalid.

AGM is valid.

This function enables the alternate graphics mode

(AGM) commands to be used.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

This function enables the IBM mode to use the high-density

graphic printing function originally available in the EPSON

mode.

When the AGM function is valid, the software command

available in the EPSON mode can be used even in the IBM

mode.

Supplementary notes

Command AGM invalid (NO) AGM valid (YES)

ESC 3 n

Specifying n/216" line feed pitch Specifying n/180" line feed pitch

ESC J n

Executing n/216" line feed pitch Executing n/180" line feed pitch

ESC A n

Registering n/72" line feed pitch that Specifying n/60" line feed pitch

is specified with ESC 2.

ESC

✻

m

Unusable Various graphic modes can be

n1 n2

executed.

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-29

— 3. Setup options —

1. EPSON mode

If AUTOFEED is selected, the printer checks the AUTO

FEED signal during initialization. It executes a carriage

return with a line feed when the AUTO FEED signal is low.

It executes a carriage return with out a line feed when the

AUTO FEED signal is high. The AUTO FEED signal is

usable only when the PARALLEL interface or AUTO is

selected. A carriage return without a line feed is executed

when the SERIAL interface is selected.

2. IBM or HP mode

If AUTOFEED is selected, a carriage return without a line

feed is executed.

CR code function

Function

#27

CR : CR ONLY

CR : CR + LF

27 CR SETTING

Carriage return without a line feed

CR : AUTOFEED AUTO FEED signal enabled

Carriage return with a line feed

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to feed a line

when the printer receives a carriage return (CR)

command.

LF code function

Function

#28

LF : LF ONLY

LF : LF + CR

28 LF SETTING

Line feed without a carriage return

Line feed with a carriage return

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to execute a

carriage return when the printer receives a line feed

(LF) command.

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

When SIMPLE is selected, the accent character of the

resident font is printed. When COMPO. is selected, the

accent symbol and the character are printed separately to

add the accent symbol in the proper position.

Accent character

3-30 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#29

29 ACCENT CHR.

PRINT: SIMPLE A

A

(Printing Example)

PRINT: COMPO.

~

~

This function specifies the method of printing accent

characters.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

Zero font style

Function

#30

ZERO: NO-SLSH

30 ZERO STYLE

0

0

ZERO: SLASHED

Two types of zeros are available: 0 with a slash, and 0

with no slash. This function allows the user to select

either font.

Setting procedures

The use of the slashed zero font helps to distinguish zero (0)

from the capital alphabetic letter "O".

Supplementary notes

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-31

— 3. Setup options —

Horizontal tab

Function

#31

31 TABULATION

TAB: 2 CHAR

TAB: 4 CHAR

TAB: 6 CHAR

TAB: 8 CHAR

TAB: 10 CHAR

TAB: 12 CHAR

The actual position of the horizontal tab depends on the

processing of the selected emulation.

Setting procedures

Output data can be printed within the printable area of the form by

adjusting the tab when outputting nested program lists.

Locking page length

Function

#32

Software command is invalid.

32 PAGE LOCK

Software command is valid.

LOCK: NO

LOCK: YES

This function specifies whether or not to change the

page length specified in the SETUP MODE by a

software command.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

The right and left margins can be changed by software

commands regardless of this function. This function can also

specify whether or not to change the top and bottom margins

by a software commands.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

33 FONT LOCK

LOCK: NO

Software command is invalid.

Software command is valid.

LOCK: YES

3-32 — 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Locking font

Function

#33 This function specifies whether or not to change the

typeface of font selected in the SETUP MODE by a

software command.

Setting procedures

Locking character pitch

Function

#34 This function specifies whether or not to change the

character pitch selected in the SETUP MODE by a

software command.

34 PITCH LOCK

LOCK: YES Software command is invalid.

Software command is valid.

LOCK: NO

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-33

— 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Locking character quality

Function

#35 This function specifies whether or not to change the

character quality selected in the SETUP MODE by a

software command.

35 QLTY LOCK

Software command is invalid.

Software command is valid.

LOCK: YES

LOCK: NO

Setting procedures

Locking character table

Function

#36 This function specifies whether or not to change the

character table selected in the SETUP MODE by a

software command.

36 CHR TBL LOCK

LOCK: YES

LOCK: NO

Software command is invalid.

Software command is valid.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-34 — 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

FF code set at TOF position

Function

#37 This function specifies whether or not FF (Form Feed)

is executed at TOF.

When “YES

” is set, the FF code performs Form Feed even if

the present position is at TOF.

When “NO” is set, the FF code is ignored when the present

position is at TOF.

37 FF CODE/TOF

FF CODE/TOF : NO

FF CODE/TOF : YES

Certain kinds of software send commands to feed a

blank page without printing. Select "FF CODE/TOF

:NO" to neglect this command.

Supplementary notes

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-35

— 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Setting the graphic printing speed

Function

#38 120DPI, 180DPI, 240DPI and 360 DPI graphic

printing speeds are set.

38 GR QLTY

QLTY : MODE2

QLTY : MODE3

QLTY : MODE1

The graphic printing speed setting selects the character

quality in the panel setting and is effective only when

"Quality : NORMAL LQ" is selected.

Supplementary notes

Graphic MODE

MODE 1

MODE 2

MODE 3

Printing speed

Slow

Normal

Fast

Quality

Fine

Normal

Coarse

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-36 — 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Validity of bar code and enlarged character

Function

#40

40 BC / L.CHR

BC: IGNORED Bar code and enlarged character are invalid.

Bar code and enlarged character are valid.

BC: MODE 1

BC: MODE 2

This function specifies whether or not to activate the

bar code and enlarged character function. If MODE 1

or MODE 2 is selected, the bar code and enlarged

character can be printed.

If MODE 1 is selected, ESC SI or ESC SO cannot be used for

the bar code data start or stop command.

If MODE 2 is selected, ESC SI or ESC SO can be used for the

bar code data start or stop command.

See page 5-1 for details of the bar code.

See page 5-16 for details of the enlarged character.

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84

3-37

— 3. Setup options —

Bar code type

Function

#41

41 BC TYPE

TYPE: INDST25

TYPE: INTRL25

TYPE: MATRIX

TYPE: CODABAR

TYPE: CODE11

TYPE: CODE39

TYPE: CODE93

TYPE: CODE128

TYPE: EAN-8

TYPE: EAN-13

TYPE: UPC-A

TYPE: UPC-E

TYPE: POSTNET

TYPE: ELEMENT

Industrial 2 of 5

Interleaved 2 of 5

Matrix 2 of 5

CODABAR

CODE 11

CODE 39

CODE 93

**

CODE 128

EAN-8

EAN-13

POSTNET

UPC-E

UPC-A

This function specifies one of thirteen available types

of bar code.

The bar code type specified here is regarded as the default setting,

which can be changed by a software command.

Setting procedures

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Bar code Structure ICG letters (#) Check character Sample data Remark

Industrial 2/5 5B4S Yes 0-9 Yes 1234567

(Mod 10)

Interleaved 2/5 5B5S No 0-9 Yes 1234567

(2 characters (Mod 10)

as one unit)

Codabar 4B3S Yes 0-9, Yes 1234567

(Mod 16)

Matrix 2/5 3B2S Yes 0-9 Yes 1234567

(Mod 10)

Code 11 3B2S Yes 0-9,"-" Yes 1234567

(Mod 11)

Code 39 5B4S Yes 0-9, Yes 1234567

AB,...(43) (Mod 43)

Code 93 3B3S No ASCII Yes 1234567

(128) (Mod 47)

Code 128 3B3S No ASCII Yes 1234567

(128) (Mod 103)

EAN-8 2B2S No 0-9 Yes 4912345

(Mod 10)

EAN-13 2B2S No 0-9 Yes 491234567890

(Mod 10)

UPC-A 2B2S No 0-9 Yes 01234500006

(Mod 10)

UPC-E 2B2S No 0-9 Yes 01234500006

(Mod 10)

Postnet 2LB3SB No 0-9 Yes 123456789

(Mod 10)

3-38 — 3. Setup options —

Even number, including

check character. Data

length is variable.

Start and end codes are

sent by the user.

Start and end codes are (∆)

code. Dual check character

Start and end codes are

asterisk (*) codes.

Two check characters

8 digits (2 prefix code +5

data code+Check character)

13 digits (2 prefix code +10

data code+Check character)

12 digits (NSC+10 data+

Check character)

UPC-A (12-digit) data is

automatically converted into

UPC-E (10-digit) data.

6, 10 or 12 digits

(data +Check character)

Bar code specifications

The table below shows the specifications of thirteen types of bar codes

available for the printer. Bar code printing examples are shown on the

previous page.

"B" and "S" in the "Structure" column show the number of

bars and spaces which consist of one or two characters. LB

and SB mean long bar and short bar, respectively.

Special

characters: 24

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84

3-39

— 3. Setup options —

Bar code size

Function

#42 This function specifies the default bar code size.

Enlarged character size

Function

#43

43 LARGE CH. SIZE

SIZE : 1

SIZE : 2

SIZE : 4

SIZE : 8

SIZE : 12

SIZE : 16

SIZE : 24

SIZE : 32

This function specifies the default size of enlarged

characters.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

42 BC SIZE

BC SIZE : 1

BC SIZE : 1.5

BC SIZE : 2

BC SIZE : 2.5

The tables below show bar code sizes and attributes.

Supplementary notes

HRI PRINT BELOW

HRI FONT OCR-B

CHECK CHARACTER Added

PRINT DENSITY 1/120 inch

SIZE 1 1.5 2 2.5

NARROW BAR 2/120inch 3/120inch 4/120inch 5/120inch

WIDE BAR 6/120inch 9/120inch 12/120inch 15/120inch

NARROW SPACE 2/120inch 3/120inch 4/120inch 5/120inch

WIDE SPACE 6/120inch 9/120inch 12/120inch 15/120inch

INTER CHARA. GAP 2/120inch 3/120inch 4/120inch 5/120inch

BAR HEIGHT 8/12inch 8/12inch 12/12inch 12/12inch

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-40 — 3. Setup options —

Software setup

Function

#44

44 SETUP COMMAND

SETUP: VALID

SETUP: IGNORED 1

Setup can be specified by

a software command.

SETUP: IGNORED 2

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to accept the

software set up command.

PCL mode (HP)

Function

#50

50 PCL MODE

EML: PCL3+

EML: PCL3

EML: PCL3+D

Setting procedures

This function specifies the emulation level in the HP

mode.

PCL3:

Fully compatible with the RuggedWriter 480. The character

pitches (15,17.1 and 24) and print quality modes (HQDR,NLQ,

S.D.,S.S.D.) cannot be selected by software commands.

PCL3+:

Extra capability to the RuggedWriter 480. In this mode,

additional character pitches, print quality modes, and raster

gaphics resolutions may be selected by software command.

PCL3+D:

Limited DeskJet compatibilty. In this mode, the commands

“ESC * P # Y” and “ESC * p # X” define units in 1/360”.

If you want print DeskJet application data,you can make use of

PCL3+D. The print position and graphics of the PCL3+D are

closer than the other two modes to the DeskJet.

Supplementary notes

The setup command is ignored when "IGNORED 1" is selected.

The setup command and paper path command are ignored when

"IGNORED 2" is selected.

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84

3-41

— 3. Setup options —

Secondary character table (HP)

Function

#51

51 CHR TB2 HP

TBL: LINE

MATH-7

TBL: MATH

LINE DRAW

Setting Option

Function

#60

60 OPTION

The CSF can be used.

The rear tractor can be used.

OPTION: CSF

NOT INSTALL

OPTION: REAR Tr.

This function specifies whether or not to install

option.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

This function specifies the symbol set of the

secondary character set in the HP mode.

Supplementary notes

When the CSF (cut sheet feeder) is selected, the rear tractor

cannot be used. Similarly, when the rear tractor is selected,

the cut sheet feeder cannot be used.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Paper path

3-42 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#61

61 PAPER PATH

PATH: F.Tr TOP

PATH: MAN FRNT

PATH: R.Tr FRNT

PATH: F.Tr REAR

PATH: MAN TOP

PATH: MAN REAR

PATH: CSF FRNT

PATH: CSF TOP

This function selects the paper path from among eight

available selections.

This option has the same function as the PAPER PATH key on the

control panel.

Automatic scrolling

Function

#62

62 AUTO SCROLL

NO SCROLL

SCROLL : 0.5 SEC

SCROLL : 1 SEC

SCROLL : 5 SEC

SCROLL : 10 SEC

SCROLL : 15 SEC

This function selects the timeout period for automatic scrolling.

When the preset timeout period has passed after data in the communication

buffer is processed, and no new data is received, the perforation of the current

page is fed to the paper cutter position, allowing printed data to be examined.

This timeout period can be set to 0.5, 1, 5, 10 or 15 seconds.

This function is valid only when printing on fanfold paper.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

Supplementary notes

Priority is given to the most recent setting made with the PAPER

PATH key or in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-43

— 3. Setup options —

This function specifies whether or not to perform the

skew detection for checking whether paper has been

loaded manually on the skew.

If YES is selected, the printer ejects the paper loaded on the skew.

Out-of-paper detection

Function

#63

Skew detection

Function

#64

63 P.OUT DTCT

DETECT: NO Out-of-paper detection is

not performed.

Out-of-paper detection is

performed.

DETECT: YES

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to perform paper

bottom detection.

When NO is selected, printing continues for the page length that is

specified and out-of-paper is ignored even when the paper is out.

64 P.SKEW DTCT

DETECT: NO Skew detection is not performed.

Skew detection is performed.

DETECT: YES

Supplementary notes

This function should be set to NO when printing on paper

with binding holes or when using paper on which a

pattern is printed on the back.

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

With the NORMAL line feed speed selected, the line feed

speed is reduced to half (i.e., 30 lps) when the line feed pitch

is 1/3 inch and below, or paper is loaded.

66 LF SPEED

Line feeding at normal speed (60 lps)

Line feeding at half speed (30 lps)

Line feeding at 1/3 speed (20 lps)

SPEED: NORMAL

SPEED: 1/2

SPEED: 1/3

Paper jam detection

3-44 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#65 This function specifies whether or not to perform the

paper jam detection.

If YES is selected, the printer automatically stops printing in case

of paper jamming.

Setting procedures

Paper jam detection is not

performed.

Paper jam detection is

performed.

DETECT: NO

DETECT: YES

65 P.JAM DTCT

Line feed speed

Function

#66 This function specifies the line feed speed.

The 1/2 or 1/3 line feed speed feeds paper more stably. It is useful

for thick paper, labeled sheets and multipart paper in continuous

printing.

Setting procedures

Supplementary notes

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-45

— 3. Setup options —

Setting of the auto-scrolling position

Function

#67 Set the position for executing auto-scrolling.

In the case of "TOF ONLY" : Auto-scrolling is performed

only when the present position is at TOF .

"ANY POS" : If the perforation is between the paper cutter

and printing head position, auto-scroll is performed at any

position after a prescribed time after the printing.

Setting procedures

SCROLL : TOF ONLY

SCROLL : ANY POS

67 SCROLL POS.

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-46

Interface

Function

#70

Setting procedures

This function selects the parallel or serial interface.

Setting procedures

70 INTERFACE

I/F: SERIAL

Parallel interface is selected.

RS-232C serial interface is selected.

Parallel and serial interfaces are switched

automatically.

I/F: PARALLEL

I/F: AUTO

See page 7-1 for details of the parallel interface.

See page 7-5 for details of the serial interface.

The functions shown below are available according to the

interface type.

The printer is set to the standard parallel and serial interface

before shipment. If it does not print data properly, recheck

the functions shown below. For the settings for the serial

interface, refer to the manual of the computer.

Supplementary notes

EXTENDED SETUP MODE Factory setting Page

#70.INTERFACE PARALLEL 3-46

#71.SELECT IN ENABLE 0 3-47

#81.BUFFER SIZE 512 KB 3-52

#82.BUSY/ACK TIMING TYPE 2 3-53

#83.DATA LATCH TIMING TYPE F. 3-53

#84.ERROR STATUS YES. 3-54

EXTENDED SETUP MODE Factory setting Page

#70.INTERFACE PARALLEL 3-46

#71.SELECT IN ENABLE 0 3-47

#72.PARITY BIT Non 3-47

#73.DATA LENGTH 8 bits 3-48

#74.STOP BIT 1 bit 3-48

#75.PROTOCOL DTR 3-49

#76.BAUD RATE 9600 bps 3-49

#77.SERIAL ERROR Print 3-50

#78.CTS ENABLE No 3-50

#79.CD ENABLE No 3-51

#80.DSR ENABLE No 3-51

#81.BUFFER SIZE 512 KB 3-52

Parallel I/F Serial I/F

— 3. Setup options —

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-47

Printer select command

— 3. Setup options —

Function

#71 This function specifies whether or not to perform the

printer select command.

Setting procedures

71 SLCT IN ENBL

SLCT IN: 1

SLCT IN: 0

Printer select command is always

accepted.

SLCT IN: I/F

Printer select command is always

ignored.

Printer select command is accepted

when SELECT IN signal is set high.

It is ignored when SELECT IN

signal is set low.

Parity bit (Serial I/F)

Function

#72

Setting procedures

This function specifies the parity bit when the serial

interface is used.

72 PARITY BIT

PARITY : EVEN

Parity check is not executed.

PARITY : ODD

Even number check is executed

Odd number check is executed.

PARITY : NON

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-48 — 3. Setup options —

Data length (Serial I/F)

Function

#73

73 DATA LENGTH

LENGTH: 8 BITS

LENGTH: 7 BITS

Data length is set to 8 bits.

Data length is set to 7 bits.

Stop bit (Serial I/F)

Function

#74

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

This function specifies the data length when the serial

interface is used.

This function specifies the stop bit when the serial

interface is used

74 STOP BIT

STOP BIT: 1 BIT

STOP BIT: 2 BITS

Stop bit length is set to 1 bit.

Stop bit length is set to 2 bits.

Select the data length: 8 bits or 7 bits.

Supplementary notes

Select the stop bit length: 1 or 2 bits.

Supplementary notes

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-49

Protocol (Serial I/F)

— 3. Setup options —

Function

#75

75 PROTOCOL

PROT: DTR

PROT: XON/OF1

PROT: XON/OF2

PROT: ETX/ACK

DRT (ready/busy) protocol is selected.

X-ON/X-OFF protocol (I) is selected.

X-ON/X-OFF protocol (II) is selected.

EXT/ACK protocol is selected.

This function specifies the protocol for the serial

interface.

Baud rate (Serial I/F)

Function

#76

76 BAUD RATE

SPEED: 38400 B

SPEED: 19200 B

SPEED: 9600 B

SPEED: 2400 B

SPEED: 1200 B

SPEED: 600 B

SPEED: 4800 B SPEED: 300 B

This function specifies the data transmission rate for

the serial interface..

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-50 — 3. Setup options —

Serial error (Serial I/F)

Function

#77

77 SERIAL ERROR

S. ERROR: PRINT

S. ERROR: IGNORED

Asterisk (✽) is printed in case of error.

Error is ignored.

CTS signal (Serial I/F)

Function

#78

78 CTS ENABLE

CTS: NO

CTS: YES

CTS signal is ignored.

CTS signal is valid.

This function specifies whether or not to validate the

CTS (clear to send) signal.

When the X-ON/X-OFF protocol or ETX/ACK protocol is used,

the CTS signal is used to output data from the printer to the

computer.

Setting procedures

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to print asterisk

‘✻’when a serial data transmission error occurs during

communication via the serial interface.

The serial data transmission error includes a parity error, framing

error and over-run error.

If a serial data transmission error occurs with the SERIAL

ERROR option selected to PRINT, the data in error is printed

as asterisk "✻". If data exceeding the buffer size is sent while

the printer is busy, the excess data is ignored. If a serial data

transfer error occurs with the SERIAL ERROR option set to

IGNORED, the erroneous data is discarded.

Supplementary notes

If this option is set to NO, the printer sends data to the

computer regardless of the CTS signal status.

If this option is set to YES, the printer checks the CTS signal

status to send data to the computer.

Supplementary notes

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-51

If this option is set to NO, the printer processes the received

data as valid data regardless of the CD signal status.

If this option is set to YES, the printer checks the CD signal

status to receive data from the computer.

CD signal (Serial I/F)

— 3. Setup options —

Function

#79

79 CD ENABLE

CD: NO

CD: YES

CD signal is ignored.

CD signal is valid.

This function specifies whether or not to validate the

CD (carrier detect) signal.

The CD signal indicates whether or not a modem is connected to a

communication line.

Supplementary notes

Setting procedures

DSR signal (Serial I/F)

Function

#80

Setting procedures

This function specifies whether or not to validate the

DSR(data set ready) signal.

The DSR signal indicates the status of the modem or computer.

If this option is seto to NO, the printer processes the received

data as valid data regardless of the DSR signal status.

If this option is set toYES, the printer checks the DSR signal

status to receive data from the computer.

80 DSR ENABLE

DSR: NO

DSR: YES

DSR signal is ignored.

DSR signal is valid.

Supplementary notes

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-52 — 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Input buffer size

Function

#81 This function specifies the size of the input buffer. The

buffer sizes shown below are provided.

81 BUFFER SIZE

B.SIZE: 512 KB

B.SIZE: 8 KB

Buffer size of512KB selected.

Buffer size of 8KB selected.

B.SIZE: 128 B Buffer size of 128 bytes selected.

The buffer sizes shown below are provided.

CIN :

The printer enters the busy state when the

available space in the buffer is reduced below the

CIN value.

CRN :

The printer enters the ready state when the

available space in the buffer exceeds the CRN

value.

When the serial interface is used, processing differs

according to the protocol as shown below when the available

space in the buffer is inadequate.

Protocol

DTR

(Ready/Busy)

CIN processing CRN processing

X-ON/X-OFF(I)

X-ON/X-OFF(II)

ETX/ACK

BUSY READY

Sends X-OFF Sends X-ON

Stops sending ACK Begins sending ACK

Supplementary notes

BUFFER

SIZE

Parallel I/F Serial I/F

512K byte 1K byte 2K byte

CIN CRN

1K byte 2K byte

CIN CRN

8K byte

128 byte 32 byte 64 byte32byte 64 byte

When the printer enters the CIN processing in the parallel

interface, data is input at 0.5 seconds intervals.

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-53

— 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Busy/ACK signal timing (Parallel I/F)

Function

#82 This function specifies the timing of the BUSY and

ACK signals transmitted via the parallel interface.

82 BUSY/ACK

TIMING: TYPE 1

TIMING: TYPE 2

TIMING: TYPE 3

BUSY

ACK

BUSY

ACK

BUSY

ACK

Timimg

Type

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

Rising edge

Center

Falling edge

ACK signal

Data latch timing(Parallel I/F)

Function

#83

83 DATA LATCH

LTCH: TYPE F.

LTCH: TYPE R.

Timimg

Type

TYPE F.

TYPE R.

STROBE

DATA 1~8

STROBE

DATA 1~8

Falling edge

Rising edge

STROBE signal

This function specifies the timing to latch DATA 1 ~ 8

at the falling edge (TYPE F.) or rising edge (TYPE R.)

of the STROBE signal.

Setting procedures

TYPE F

.

Data is read in when the STROBE signal goes Low.

TYPE R.

Data is read in when the STROBE signal goes High.

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-54 — 3. Setup options —

Function

#84

Error status signal output setting

(parallel interface)

When NO is selected, the status of the PE, ERROR,

and SELECT signals does not change even if the

printer is in out-of-paper, error, or offline state.

This function is effective when the system outputs

the printing data again when an error occurs.

This function specifies whether or not to output the

parallel interface error status signal (PE, ERROR,

SELECT) when an error occurs.

84 ERROR STATUS

ERROR STATUS: YES

ERROR STATUS: NO

#1 ~ #9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-55

Setting procedures

— 3. Setup options —

Display language on LCD

Function

#91

91 DISPLAY LANG

LANG: ENGLISH

LANG: DEUTSCH

English

German

LANG: FRANCAIS French

LANG: ESPANOL Spanish

LANG: ITALIANO Italian

This function specifies the display language on the

LCD.

Printing direction

Function

#90 The three printing directions shown below are available.

PRE-DIRECTION: Bi-directional printing 1

Printing is done in the shortest distance through logical seeking.

When double striking, vertical double-size character printing, or

other special effect printings require several passes, they are

carried out in the same direction as the first pass.

BI-DIRECTION: Bi-directional printing 2

Logical seeking is carried out toward the closer printing start

position from the current head position to perform printing in

the shortest direction.

UNI-DIRECTION: Unidirectional printing

Printing is always done in the same direction, from the left to

right.

90 PRINT DIR

PRINT: PRE-DIR

PRINT: UNI-DIR

PRINT: BI-DIR

Setting procedures

#1~#9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

3-56 — 3. Setup options —

Setting procedures

Locking panel keys

Function

#92

92 KEY LOCK

KEY LOCK: NO

KEY LOCK: YES

Pressing a key is valid in the ONLINE

state.

Pressing a key is ignored in the ONLINE

state.

This function specifies whether or not to validate the

keys other than the RESET key (i.e., ALT + TEAR

OFF keys) and ONLINE key in the ONLINE state.

Setting procedures

Locking reset key

Function

#93

93 RESET LOCK

KEY LOCK: NO

KEY LOCK: YES

RESET key is valid in the ONLINE

state.

RESET key is ignored in ONLINE

state.

This function specifies whether or not to validate the

RESET key in the ONLINE state.

#1~#9 #10 ~ #20 #20 ~ #29 #30 ~ #38 #40 ~ #44 #50, #51 #60 ~ #67 #70 ~ #79 #80 ~ #84 #90 ~ #95

3-57

— 3. Setup options —

Setting ENERGY STAR

Function

#94

SLEEP MODE : YES

94 SLEEP MODE

SLEEP MODE : NO

This function sets the power conservation standby mode.

When this mode is valid, if the standby mode continues

about 14 minutes after printing, the power conservation

mode is engaged. The normal mode is effective when

any print action is performed.

Setting procedures

Printing setup list

Function

#95

LIST : PATH & FORM

95 SETUP LISTING

LIST : EXTEND

LIST : ALL SET

This function prints the list of the parameters specified

in the setup mode.

Setting procedures

#1 ~ #9

#10 ~ #20

#20 ~ #29

#30 ~ #38

#40 ~ #44

#50, #51

#70 ~ #79

#80 ~ #84

#90 ~ #95 #60 ~ #67

Display Print

PATH&FORM

Selectable paper

paths and six format memories.

EXTEND Parameters specified on the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE are printed.

ALL SET All parameters specified in the setup modes and data in

the six memories are printed.

The printer has both standard and high-speed print modes.

The following table shows the print modes.

When NLQ, HQDR, DRAFT, S. D. or S.S.D. is

selected, the graphic is printed at high speed with

lower bit density.

Select a quality with the QUALITY key or with #10

QUALITY in the SETUP MODE.

4-1

— 4. Functions —

4. Functions

High-speed printing

SET UP

LQ

NLQ

HQDR

DRAFT

S.D.

S.S.D.

ESC x 1

LQ is selected.

Selected with the QUALITY key or with #10 QUALITY in the SETUP MODE.

ESC x 0

Draft is selected.

LQ

NLQ

LQ

LQ

S.D.

S.S.D

Draft

Draft

HQDR

Draft

S.D.

S.S.D

LQ (10 cpi)

NLQ (10 cpi)

HQDR (10 cpi)

DRAFT (10 cpi)

S.D. (12 cpi)

S.S.D. (15 cpi)

Print mode

180 CPS

240 CPS

360 CPS

603 CPS

723 CPS

904 CPS

(CPS=Character / Sec.)

Printing speed

Operation procedures

See pages 2-3 and 3-17.

4-2

The printer has an enhanced printing mode for printing on

multipart forms. With this function, the printer can print data

on a multipart form consisting of an original sheet and up to

eight sheets.

Select a mode with #1 MULTIPART in the SETUP

MODE.

This function specifies the printing start position from the top

of paper, from 0/60 to 63/60 inches, as shown below.

Specify the TOF position using #3 TOF

ADJUSTMENT in the SETUP MODE.

If the TOF position needs to be changed further, press

the MICRO LF or MICRO RLF key to adjust the

printing start position.

The TOF SET key can also be used for fanfold paper.

(Be sure to close the printer cover when adjusting the

TOF position.)

— 4. Functions —

●

Functions

Enhancing the copying capability for multipart forms

Operation procedures

See page 3-8.

See page 3-10.

Setting the printing start position

0/60 inch

Printable area

Printable area

#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT in

SETUP MODE

63/60 inch

TOF position

0/60~14/60 inch

Caution The TOF position can be set from 0/60

inch (0 mm).

However, if it is set of 0/60 to 9/60

inch, paper may jamdepending on the

condition of the paper.

Normally, it is recommended that the

TOF position be adjusted to the 14/60

inch (approximately 6 mm) position

from the top of paper.

Operation procedures

This function feeds the perforation of paper to the paper cutter

position to cut the paper easily. It is useful for ejecting paper

to the top of the printer when the front or rear tractor is used.

Press the TEAR OFF key to feed the perforation to

the paper cutter. Cut the paper, then press the TEAR

OFF key again. The paper is fed back to the

previous position.

To cut the paper fed out from the front of the tractor,

hold the upper cover firmly with one hand and tear

the paper towards you down wards.

4-3

— 4. Functions —

Feeding perforation to the cutter position

See page 2-1.

●

Functions

Operation procedures

Although safe, take care not to brush your fingers

along the edge of the paper cutter.

Caution

Use the paper cutter attached to the upper cover to cut

the paper. Using another part of the printer to cut the

paper forcibly may result in damage to the printer.

Caution

!

1

Paper cutter

4-4

This function controls the line feed speed to feed thick

copying paper more stably.

In the 1/2 or 1/3 mode, line feeding is always carried out at 1/3 or 1/2

speed. This function is useful for printing data on multipart forms.

Select the mode using #66 LF SPEED in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

When the multipart forms are bound by paper staples or paper fasteners,

select FASTENER MODE: YES in the #15 paper fastener mode setting.

When the perforation peak of the multipart fanfold paper is too high, select

HEAD LIFT UP: YES in the #16 the head-up mode setting.

Select the mode using #15 paper fastener mode

setting and #16 perforation head-up mode setting in

the SETUP MODE.

This automatic scroll function feeds the perforation to the

paper cutter position automatically when no data is received

for a preset period.

If the input buffer becomes empty in the ONLINE state and no input data

is received for a preset period (0.5, 1, 5, 10 or 15 seconds), the printer

automatically feeds the perforation at the top of the next page to the paper

cutter position and waits in this standby mode until additional input data is

received.

When the printer receives additional input data in this standby condition, it

reverse feeds paper to the correct print position and resumes printing there.

If the perforation is located at the paper cutter position when the input buffer

becomes empty, no paper motion action occurs.

When TOF ONLY is selected together with #67 AUTO SCROLL

POISITION, auto scrolling takes place only when the present position of the

paper is TOF.

Select a mode using #62 AUTO SCROLL in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

— 4. Functions —

Automatically feeding perforation to the paper cutter

position in the standby condition

See page 3-42.

●

Functions

Operation procedures

See page 3-44.

More stable paper feeding

Operation procedures

Operation procedures

See page 3-22.

Used for restoring settings made in the setup mode to the

factory default settings.

This operation initializes all parameters on the SETUP MODE and

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

1. Keep the LINE FEED, EJECT/LOAD, PAPER

PATH and PAPER FORM keys depressed, and

turn on the printer.

2. The message shown below is displayed on the

LCD. The EEPROM is initialized.

This operation 2 initializes almost all factory default settings.

EEPROM intialization 2 = EEPROM intialization 1 + learning sensor.

1. Set 15-inch fanfold paper to the front tractors in

the parking position.

2. Keep the ALT. REVERSE LF, PAPER PATH and

PAPER FORM keys depressed, and turn on the

printer.

3. The message shown below is displayed on the

LCD. The EEPROM is initialized.

4-5

— 4. Functions —

EEPROM initialization 1

EEPROM INITIAL 1

●

Functions

Operation procedures

EEPROM initialization 2

Operation procedures

EEPROM INITIAL 2

4-6

The printer has two printing adjustment modes to correct misalignment

due to printer instrumentation error or aging deterioration: printing start

position adjustment mode (mode A), and bi-directional printing position

adjustment mode (mode B). These two modes allow the printing position

to be corrected properly.

The printing start position adjustment mode (mode A) corrects

misalignment in the printing start positions for printing at different speeds.

This allows data to be printed at the same start position even at different

printing speeds.

The bi-directional printing position adjustment mode (mode B) corrects

misalignment in bi-directional printing at the same printing speed. It

selects the proper correction value for each printing speed.

1. Set fanfold paper that is 10 inches or more in

width to the printer. Feed one or more pages of

paper and then select this mode.

2. Keep the SET UP and EJECT/LOAD keys

depressed and turn on the printer. The printer

enters the printing position adjustment mode.

3. Select a mode with the

then press the ENTER key.

The procedures shown below are used for both modes A

and B.

— 4. Functions —

Correcting vertical misalignment

A change in mode A has effects mode B. If a change is

made in mode A, mode B must also be set properly. The

printer starts up in mode A and then enters mode B

automatically. If no change is made in mode A, the

printing position can be changed in mode B only.

ALIGN ADJUST

A: START POS.ADJ B: VERT ADJ

Key

Display

Keep SET UP and EJECT/LOAD keys depressed and turn on the printer

Operation procedures

●

Functions

key, or

4. Press the ENTER key and the timing pattern in

mode A (or mode B) will be printed.

Numbers marked with asterisks indicate the currently set

timing numbers. In mode A, modes 1 to 11 are printed. In

mode B, modes 0 to 11 are printed.

In each mode, 13 timing patterns are printed.

5. Select a speed mode number to be changed in the

printed patterns.

6. Select the best aligned pattern in the same speed

mode.

Check the alignment of the two line"H"printing.

7. Then press the ENTER key.

The selected timing is temporarily stored in the printer, and

test printing is executed at that timing.

8. Repeat steps 5 to 7 to change the speed modes.

9. Press the EXIT key to finish setting.

The timing stored temporarily is saved in the setup memory

(EEPROM). Therefore, be sure to press the EXIT key to exit

the mode.

10. Processing when the EXIT key will be pressed

differs according to the mode as shown below.

a. If mode A is exit, the menu of mode B will be displayed.

Press the ENTER key, and the patterns of mode B are

printed. Hereinafter, follow step 5 and so on.

b. If mode B is exit, the printer is reset automatically and

exits mode B.

4-7

— 4. Functions —

A-MODE 1: NO.6

A-MODE 3: NO.6

Select with or key.

For example, mode 1 is changed to mode. 3.

A-MODE 3: NO.6

A-MODE 3: NO.8

Select with or key.

For example, mode 6 is changed to mode 8.

●

Functions

4-8

The printer has six memories for saving data on forms:

MEMO 1 to MEMO 6. The following shows an example of

storing the sizes of three forms used in the manual mode in

MEMO 1 to MEMO 3.

1. Press the PAPER PATH key to select MANUAL →

FRONT.

2. Press the PAPER FORM key to select MEMO 1.

3. Specify the A5 portrait form with #4 PAGE LENGTH

in the SETUP MODE, then save the setting as shown

below.

4. Likewise, specify the Letter portrait form in MEMO 2

and the A3 portrait form in MEMO 3. The following

messages will be displayed on the LCD.

5. In printing, select the MEMO containing the form

size to be used with the PAPER FORM key.

— 4. Functions —

Using various types of paper

MAN FRNT LT p MAN FRNT A3 p

See page 1-11.

PAPER FORM

1 MULTIPART

4 PAGE LENGTH

SIZE: A5 p

PAGE: 11 INCH*

ENTER

SIZE: A5 p

SET UP

1 MULTIPART

SAVE?: YES*

EXIT

PAPER PATH

F.TR. REAR 11x15 MAN FRNT A4 p

ENTER

MAN FRNT A5 p

MAN FRNT 11x15 MAN FRNT A4 p

MAN FRNT 11x15

SIZE: A5 p*

4 PAGE LENGTH

4 PAGE LENGTH

Operation procedures

●

Functions

4-9

— 4. Functions —

The printer can execute test printing.

1. Keep the ONLINE and REVERSE LF keys depressed

and turn on the printer.

2. The following message will be displayed on the LCD.

The printer starts test printing.

3. To terminate test printing, turn the power switch to

off.

Key shortcut functions are executed by pressing and holding

the corresponding keys while simultaneously turning on the

printer power. The following table shows the available

shortcut functions.

Executing test printing

Key shortcut functions

DEMO PRINT LQ

Note that, if the EEPROM is initialized, all the data

specified in the EEPROM is deleted.

Operation

Self Test Draft

Self Test LQ

Hex Dump Draft

Hex Dump LQ

Demo Print Draft

Demo Print LQ

Vertical Alignment

EEPROM Initialization

ONLINE

FORM FEED

LINE FEED

REVERSE LF

PAPER FORM

PAPER PATH

TEAR OFF

EJECT/LOAD

SET UP

ALT

Power

Operation procedures

●

Functions

4-10

About Printer

driver

Printer Driver is a section of your software that automatically translates

instructions from the software to your printer.

For example, when using some application softwares, if you want to

boldface or underline a word, the printer driver automatically translates

your specific boldface or underline instruction on your application

software to printer control command.

Different printers use different control codes for designating print styles.

Therefore, it is important that when you install your software, you select

the appropriate printer driver designed for your printer.

Printer driver selection

Select a suitable printer driver from the list of supported printers. This

would include either the Hewlett Packard RuggedWriter 480, Epson LQ-

2550 or IBM 2391. Each of these printer drivers should allow you to

access many of the features on your printer.

If this printer is not listed, look for the following printer drivers. While

this should allow you to print your document with your printer, it probably

will not allow you to access many features of the printer. A few of the

choices you may see are given below in order of preferences.

Hewlett Packard Epson IBM

RuggedWriter 480 LQ-2500/2550 2390/2391

DeskJet 500 LQ-1050/1000 Proprinter XL24E

EX-1000 Proprinter XL24

Proprinter 24P

Notes:

1. Set the emulation type in the extension setup options according to the

selection of printer driver. For example, when you select the Epson

LQ-2550 printer driver, you should set the emulation type to the Epson

mode.

2. If you select the DiskJet 500 printer driver, you should set the #50 PCL

MODE to PCL3+D.

— 4. Functions —

●

Functions

Setting the application software

●

Functions

Installing the Windows Printer Driver

The diskette provided with your printer contains the software you need to

operate your printer with Windows applications. Before you install the

printer driver, we recommend you to read the README.TXT file on the

diskette. The README.TXT file contains all the information necessary

to install the printer driver, as well as all other pertinent information

regarding this software.

The printer driver tells Windows what information to send to the printer,

including details about printer features, the printer interface, and fonts.

Follow the next procedure before installing the Windows printer driver.

1. Close all Windows applications. Otherwise you will get an error

message when you attempt to install the printer driver.

2. Set the following parameters of Memo 1-6 to the factory default setting

in the SETUP MODE.

#3 TOF ADJUSTMENT 14/60 inch

#6 TOP MARGIN 0 LINE

#7 BOTTOM MARGIN 0 LINE

#8 LEFT MARGIN 0 CHAR

#9 RIGHT MARGIN 0 CHAR

#10 QUALITY LQ

#12 CHARACTER PITCH 10 CPI

#13 LF PITCH 6 LPI

#14 ZOOM IN/OUT 100 %

Set the following parameters to the factory default setting in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

#20 EMULATION EPSON

#27 CR SETTING CR ONLY

#28 LF SETTING LF + CR

#32 PAGE LENGTH LOCK NO

#33 FONT LOCK NO

#34 PITCH LOCK NO

#35 QUALITY LOCK NO

#36 CHARACTER TABLE LOCK NO

#44 SOFTWARE SETUP VALID

IMPORTANT INFORMATION

1. COPYING RESTRICTIONS:

You may copy this software under certain restrictions. You may make

a backup copy or copy onto a hard disk. No more than two (2) copies

of this software are permitted to be in existence at any one time.

Every copy must include all notices and markings contained in the

original provided by SEIKO Precision Inc.

2. NO LIABILITY FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES:

In no event shall SEIKO Precision Inc. be liable for any special,

indirect, incidental, or consequential damages in any way relating to

the use or rising out of the use of this software.

4-11

— 4. Functions —

4-12

Introduction

The HP emulation of the printer provides full compatibility with the

HP2235A RuggedWriter 480 printer.

The printer also provides features and capabilities beyond those ever

provided by the HP RuggedWriter printer. SEIKO Precision Inc. has

provided a means for you to access these extra capabilities for any new

applications that you may chose to print on the printer.

The extra capabilities of the printer are enabled for access through a

special control panel menu setting entitled "50 PCL MODE".

PCL Mode

• PCL3 MODE -Provides the basic RuggedWriter 480 emulation

command set.

• PCL3+ MODE –Provides extra capability to the RuggedWriter 480

command set that allows you to access many printer features through

extensions of the command set.

• PCL3+D MODE –Provides all features of PCL3+ and allows the vertical

and horizontal positioning to be set in increments of 1/360". This mode

provides a "limited" Deskjet capability, and is mainly intended for

printing from Windows using the Deskjet 500 driver. Print output from

this mode will not be identical to that of a Deskjet printer (300 vs. 360

dpi) but will be closer than the other 2 modes for this type of application.

Setup

The information provided below gives setup information of the basic

printer RuggedWriter emulation, details of the command set extensions

provided with PCL3+ and PCL3+D Mode, and information on configuring

the Serial I/O to the various Term Types used by the HP System.

Refer to the Setup options for details on using the SETUP and

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

Configuring the Printer with the RuggedWriter Emulation

1. Set the #20 EMULATION on EXTENDED SETUP MODE to "HP".

2. Set the #50 PCL MODE on EXTENDED SETUP MODE to "PCL3".

Setting the PCL MODE to "PCL3" provides the command set identical

with that of the HP RuggedWriter 480.

— 4. Functions —

●

Functions

Connecting the printer in the HP environment

Extra Capabilities for new Applications

Listed below is a summary of the expanded command sets available for

new applications. Refer to the HP software commands for details of using

the expanded command sets.

PCL3+ Mode

This operation mode provides the following extended capabilities:

PCL3+D Mode

This mode provides all of the capabilities described above plus the

following:

4-13

— 4. Functions —

●

Functions

Escape Description Added Capability

Command

BEL Activates the printer's bell Bell is now active.

ESC & k # W Controls the print direction Unidirectional, Bidirectional, Predirectional

ESC ( # id Assign the primary font PC-850, ISO25, France 2, German2,

Spain 3, Legal, Math7, Math-Symbol,

ISO84 Portugal 2, ISO85 Spain 2

ESC ) # id Assign the secondary font PC-850, ISO25, France 2, German2,

Spain 3, Legal, Math7, Math-Symbol,

ISO84 Portugal 2, ISO85 Spain 2

ESC ( s # H Sets the character pitch 15, 17.1, 24 cpi

(primary)

ESC ) s # H Sets the character pitch 15, 17.1, 24 cpi

(secondary)

ESC ( s # T Sets the primary typeface Script, Orator, Orator-s, OCR-A, OCR-B

ESC ) s # T Sets the secondary typeface Script, Orator, Orator-s, OCR-A, OCR-B

ESC * b # M Select graphics data compression Off, Mode1, Mode2, Mode3

ESC * t # R Designates raster graphics resolution 60, 360 dpi

Escape Description Added Capability

Command

ESC * p # X Sets horizontal positioning by dot 1/360"

ESC * p # Y Sets vertical positioning by dot 1/360"

4-14

Serial I/O -Configuring Term Types 18, 19, 21, 22, or 26

The printer may be attached as a spooled printer on your system. It

supports I/O status checking by responding to the interrogation string ESC

? DC1 and indicates its status concerning whether paper is loaded, printer

covers are closed, and whether or not the printer is ONLINE.

Use the printer's EXTENDED SETUP MODE to configure the following

parameters to match your host system settings:

70 INTERFACE Set to SERIAL

72 PARITY Set to match your host configuration as

NONE, EVEN or ODD match your host

setting

73 DATA LENGTH Set to match your host configuration

(Either 7 or 8 BITS)

74 STOP BIT Set to match your host configuration

(Either 1 or 2 BITS)

75 PROTOCOL Set to XON/XOFF 1

76 BAUD RATE Set to match your host configuration as

300,600,1200,2400,4800,9600,19200, or

38400

— 4. Functions —

●

Functions

5-1

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

The printer has 14 types of bar codes.

Software commands and options #40 to #42 on the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE are used to print bar codes and enlarged characters.

The software commands are unique to the printer. See the following

pages for details of these commands.

The printer can print bar codes and enlarged characters.

To activate the bar code and enlarged character function, set #40

BARCODE/ENLARGED CHAR to MODE 1 or MODE 2 in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

This function is applicable to the EPSON or IBM or HP mode. This

section describes the outline and details of the bar code and enlarged

character function.

Outline of bar code function

1.Industrial 2 of 5 8.Code 128

2.Interleaved 2 of 5 9.EAN-8

3.Matrix 2 of 5 10.EAN-13

4.Codabar 11.UPC-A

5.Code 11 12.UPC-E

6.Code 39 13.Postnet

7.Code 93 14. Element (Created in elements.)

Makeup of bar code

See page 3-36.

(Example) CODABAR

START

Character DATA

STOP

Character

Margin MarginBarcode

HRI

ICG ICG

Check

Character

Start Character : Initial character of data

DATA : Alphanumeric data

Check Character : Character for check errors in read data

Stop Character : Last character of data

HRI : Human Readable Interpretation

ICG : Gap between characters (Inter Character Gap)

Margin : Data-free portions must be provided on both sides.

Each data-free portion must be approximately ten

times as wide as the narrow space (NS).

5. Bar code and enlarged character

5-2 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(1) DC4 DC4 T Bar code type:

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 T n

Hex 14 14 54 n

Decimal 20 20 84 n

Function: Specifies the bar code type

n =0 Industrial 2 of 5 7 Code128

1 Interleaved 2 of 5 8 EAN-8

2 Matrix 2 of 5 9 EAN-13

3 Codabar 10 UPC-A

4 Code11 11 UPC-E

5 Code39 12 Postnet

6 Code93 255 Element Print

Parameter 255 (Element print) is used to print a bar code which is input element by

element. It can print a bar code which is not supported by the printer and is represented

by combining elements. Since data is input by elements, HRI printing is not performed

and no check digit is added to the bar code. The start and stop characters is also not

added.

See pages 3-37 and 3-38.

Function Command

1. Bar code type DC4 DC4 T

2. Element width DC4 DC4 E

3. Bar code height DC4 DC4 H

4. Setting HRI on and off DC4 DC4 I

5. HRI font DC4 DC4 F

6. Check character DC4 DC4 C

7. Starting the bar code data sequence ESC SI

8. Ending the bar code data seqence ESC SO

9. Bar code data sequence DC4 DC4 B

10. Printing density DC4 DC4 D

11. Guard bar expansion DC4 DC4 G

12. Start and stop characters DC4 DC4 N

13. Bar code rotational angle DC4 DC4 R

14. Disabling HRI of the start and stop characters DC4 DC4 S

15. Value input mode DC4 DC4 V

16. Initializing the bar code mode DC4 DC4 @

(Example) CODABAR

Narrow Space

Narrow Bar

START

Character STOP

Character

Wide Space

Wide Bar

Inter Character Gap

Barcode Height

Check Character

HRI

Presettable bar code function list

Bar code command list

●

Bar code function

5-3

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(2) Element width: DC4 DC4 E

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 E n1 n2

Hex 14 14 45 n1 n2

Decimal 20 20 69 n1 n2

Function:

Specifies the n2/120” or n2/180” width of the element n1.

(1 ≤n 2 ≤127)

120” or 180” is specified with the DC4 DC4 D command.

n1 = 0: Narrow bar 3: Wide space

1: Wide bar 4: Inter-character gap

2: Narrow space

The narrow bar width or narrow space is used as the element width for

Code 93, Code 128, EAN-8, EAN-13, UPC-A, and UPC-E.

One element width of bar 1: Narrow bar width

One element width of space 1: Narrow space width

The midium bar or wide space width is used as the midium element width

for Code 11. The wide element width is (wide bar width x 2 - narrow bar

width).

This setting is not valid for Postnet.

The inter-character gap means the space between each set of codes of a bar

code which begins with a bar and ends with a bar.

(3) Bar code height: DC4 DC4 H

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 H n

Hex 14 14 48 n

Decimal 20 20 72 n

Function: Sets the bar code height to n/12”. (0 ≤n ≤120)

The currently set line feed pitch serves as the bar code height when n

is set to 0. This setting is not valid for Postnet.

(4) Setting HRI on and off: DC4 DC4 I

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 I n

Hex 14 14 49 n

Decimal 20 20 73 n

Function: Specifies whether or not to print an HRI. Also specifies the

HRI printing position if an HRI is to be printed.

n = 0: HRI not printed.

1: HRI printed below the bar code symbol.

2: HRI printed above the bar code symbol.

No HRI printed for Postnet or Element regardless of this setting.

See page 5-9.

●

Bar code function

5-4 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(5) HRI font: DC4 DC4 F

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 F n

Hex 14 14 46 n

Decimal 20 20 70 n

Function: Selects the font of printing the HRI.

n = 0: Currently selected font

1: OCR-A

2: OCR-B

This setting is not valid for Postnet or Element.

(6) Check character: DC4 DC4 C

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 C n

Hex 14 14 43 n

Decimal 20 20 67 n

Function: Specifies whether to add a check character automatically.

n = 0: No check character is added. (If a check character is needed, the

user must send bar code data.)

1: A check character is added. (The check character is not printed

in the HRI when Code 93 or Code 128 is selected.)

If the Codabar or Element is selected, no check character is added regardless of

this setting.

The following shows the methods of determining the check characters and bar

code types. (For details, see “Calculating the check character” below.)

Modulus 10 Industrial 2 of 5, Interleaved 2 of 5, Matrix 2 of 5, EAN, UPC,

Postnet

Modulus 11 Code 11 (Dual Check character)

Modulus 16 Codabar

Modulus 43 Code 39

Modulus 47 Code 93 (Dual Check character)

Modulus 103 Code 128

(7) Beginning of the bar code data sequence: ESC SI

Format: ASCII ESC SI

Hex 1B 0F

Decimal 27 15

Function: Indicates the beginning of a bar code data sequence.

Data between this and the end command of the bar code data sequence

is regarded as bar code data.

This command is valid only when #40 BARCODE/ENLARGED

CHAR is set to MODE 2 in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

See pages 5-12 and -13.

●

Bar code function

5-5

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(8) End of the bar code data sequence: ESC SO

Format: ASCII ESC SO

Hex 1B 0E

Decimal 27 14

Function: Indicates the end of a bar code data sequence.

This command is valid only when #40 BARCODE/ENLARGED CHAR is

set to MODE 2 in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

(9) Bar code data sequence: DC4 DC4 B

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 B n d1 d2 ... dk

Hex 14 14 42 n

Decimal 20 20 66 n

Function: Specifies the number (“n”) of data to be regarded as bar code data.

00

≤n ≤

68

00

≤dk ≤

255

00

≤k ≤

68

If the Element is selected; 0 ≤n, dk, k ≤

255

This comand is valid when #40 BARCODE/ENLARGED CHAR is set to MODE 1

or MODE 2 in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

(10) Printing density: DC4 DC4 D

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 D n

Hex 14 14 44 n

Decimal 20 20 68 n

Function: Specifies the density of printing bar code symbols (in the horizontal

direction).

Specifies the unit of element width.

n = 0: Bar code symbols are printed at 120 dpi. (Default value)

1: Bar code symbols are printed at 180 dpi.

If a bar code is rotated by 90 or 270 degrees using the DC4 DC4 R (bar code

rotational angle) command, a bar code is printed at 120 dpi horizontally and 180 dpi

vertically.

(11) Guard bar expansion: DC4 DC4 G

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 G n

Hex 14 14 47 n

Decimal 20 20 71 n

Function: Specifies whether or not to expand EAN or UPC guard bars.

n = 0: Guard bars are not expanded.

1: Guard bars are expanded. (Default value)

●

Bar code function

5-6 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(12) Start and stop characters: DC4 DC4 N

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 N n1 n2

Hex 14 14 4E n1 n2

Decimal 20 20 78 n1 n2

Function: Specifies the Codabar start or stop character. n1 selects the

start or stop character. n2 specifies a code of the start or stop character

as shown below.

n1 = 0: Start character

1: Stop character

n2 = a, b, c, d, t, n, ✽, or e.

When power is turned on, “a” is selected as the start or stop character.

(13) Bar code rotational angle: DC4 DC4 R

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 R n

Hex 14 14 52 n

Decimal 20 20 82 n

Function: Specifies the rotational angle of the bar code in units of 90 degrees.

n = 0: 0°(Default value)

1: 90°

2: 180°

3: 270°

(14) Disabling HRI of the start and stop characters: DC4 DC4 S

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 S n

Hex 14 14 53 n

Decimal 20 20 83 n

Function: Specifies whether or not to print the start or stop character in the HRI

for Codabar, Code 11, Code 39 or Code 93.

n = 0: The start or stop character is printed in the HRI.

(Default value)

1: The start or stop character is not printed in the HRI.

(15) Value input mode: DC4 DC4 V

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 V n

Hex 14 14 56 n

Decimal 20 20 86 n

Function: Specifies whether bar code sequence data is regarded as the normal

character code or a character value when Code 128 is selected.

n = 0: Data is regarded as normal character code. (Default value)

1: Data is regarded as a character value.

If data is regarded as the normal character code, the printer

automatically move the subset or inserts a shift code according to

the data.

See page 5-11.

●

Bar code function

●

Bar code function

5-7

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(16) Initializing the bar code mode: DC4 DC4 @

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 @

Hex 14 14 40

Decimal 20 20 64

Function: Initializes the bar code mode.

The following show the default settings for bar code.

Bar code type: SETUP

Narrow bar width: SETUP

Wide bar width: SETUP

Narrow space width: SETUP

Wide space width: SETUP

Inter- character gap: SETUP

Bar code height: SETUP

Setting HRI: Below the bar code symbol

HRI font OCR-B

Check character: Added

Printing density: 1/120”

●

In a bar code data sequence, any codes other than the ESC

code are regarded as bar code data.

In a bar cord sequence following ESC SI, continuous two-

byte ESC codes (ESC + ESC) are regarded as a one-byte

ESC bar code.

●

In a barcode data sequence following ESC SI, ESC+ SO

and ESC + ESC are valid and the other ESC sequence are

ingnored. The ESC code and the following data, two bytes

in all, are discarded.

●

When a start or stop character code (e.g., *code of Code

39) is input in a bar code data sequence, the bar code data

sequence stops if bar code data has already been input in

that sequence. The data that was input is valid and

converted into a bar code. If not, the bar code data

sequence does not stop and the code is discarded.

●

When 68 bytes of data is input, the bar code data sequence

ends automatically.

When Code 93 or Code 128 is selected, the bar code data

sequence ends when the amount of input data, including the

automatically inserted control character, reaches 68 bytes.

(Bar code buffer full)

Data processing in the bar code data sequence

5-8 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

●

Bar codes are printed at normal LQ 10 cpi (158 cps) print

speed when the printing density is 120 dpi or at Dark 1 LQ

10 cpi (79 cps) print speed when the printing density is 180

dpi. This does not apply to printing paths involving HRI

printing or duty control.

●

Bar codes and normal characters are printed separately.

When the bar code data sequence is processed, print data

other than bar code data contained in the buffer is printed.

When print data other than bar code data is input, bar

code data contained in the buffer is printed.

●

Like the right margin overflow processing for character

data, data preceding bar code data is printed and the bar

code data is printed from the left margin on the following

line if the data exceeds the right margin.

If bar code data cannot be printed between the left and

right margins, the bar code data is ignored.

●

When the number of bar code symbols in the buffer

reaches 68, printing starts. (Bar code buffer full printing)

●

If the vertical line feed pitch is smaller than the bar code

height, reverse feeding is performed to move to the

following printing position.

●

If an out-of-paper error is detected in a bar code printing

path, the following paths are printed on the following

form.

Printing bar codes

●

Bar code function

5-9

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

●

The HRI is adjusted to the center of the bar code symbol

width and printed at 10 cpi unless EAN or UPC guard bar

expansion is executed. If EAN or UPC guard bar

expansion is executed, an HRI is printed at the equal space

between the center guard bar and the left or right guard

bar.

If the HRI width is greater than the bar code symbol width,

the HRI printing pitch is reduced to print the HRI in the

same width as the bar code symbol width.

●

The HRI is printed below a bar code symbol, the vertical

printing position is lower than the printing start position

by (bar code height - 1/6”). If it is printed above the bar

code symbol, the vertical printing position is higher than

the printing start position by (1/6” - 24/180”).

●

When Code 11 is selected, small triangle (

▲▲

) and large

triangle (

▲▲

) are printed as the start and stop characters,

respectively. (This does not depend on the setting of the

check character.)

●

When Code 93 is selected, white squares (

■■

) are printed

as the start and stop characters, and a black square (

■

) is

printed as the control character. A printable character

expressed in combination with the control character is

printed as is. (For example, 61H is printed as ‘a’, not ‘

■

A’.)

●

When Code 128 is selected, black rhombuses (

◆

) are

printed instead of non-printable characters (00H to IFH

and 7FH).

H R I

●

Bar code function

5-10 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

●

If a character code that is not valid for the selected bar

code type is input, the character code is not converted into

a bar code symbol but is printed as a character. If the bar

code has a start or stop character added to the HRI, the

start or stop character is printed. ‘ ’ is printed instead

of an invalid character.

●

If an incorrect number of data are input to form a bar code

which should have a specific number of data, the input

data is not converted into a bar code symbol but is printed

as a character.

●

If incorrect data is input in the UPC-A format and cannot

be converted into the UPC-E format, the input data is not

converted into a bar code symbol but is printed as a

character. (For the rules of converting the UPC-A format

into the UPC-E format, see “UPC-E conversion rule”

below.)

Error processing

●

Bar code function

5-11

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

●

The following shows the transition conditions from subset

A to subset B.

1. Input a character code unique to subset B (60H

to 7FH) when subset A is selected.

2. Then input a character code unique to subset B

(60H to 7FH) without inputting a character code

unique to subset A (00H to 1FH). (If a character

code unique to subset A is input in this step,

subset B is not selected. The character code

unique to subset B input in step 1 is expressed

with the shift code.)

●

The following shows the transition conditions from subset

B to subset A.

1. Input a character code unique to subset A when

subset B is selected.

2. Then input a character code unique to subset A

without inputting a character code unique to

subset B. (If a character code unique to subset B

is input in this step, subset A is not selected. The

character code unique to subset A input in step 1

is expressed with the shift code.)

●

Subset C is selected when four continuous character codes

(30H to 39H) are input.

●

If a code common to subset A and subset B is input when a

subset is not determined or subset C is selected, subset B is

temporarily selected.

Code 128 subset transition rule

●

Bar code function

5-12 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

●

NSC, manufacturer’s codes (M1 M2 M3 M4 M5), and

product item codes (X1 X2 X3 X4 X5) are input data.

1.

NSC must be 0 or 1.

2.

When the manufacturer’s code data is input,

the rule is determined and zero checking of the

product item codes is performed.

NZ: Non-zero ✽: 0 to 9

UCP-A Type

3.

The following table shows print data if the rule

shown above is met.

UCP-E Type

• Modulus 10

a. The data at the odd-numbered position counted from the right are

weighed as 3. The sum of the data character values is determined..

(The sum is determined without weighing for Postnet.)

b. The remainder after dividing the value determined in step a by 10 is

determined.

c. The check character is the character value determind by subtracting

the remainder in step b from 10.

UPC-E conversion rule

M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5

Rule 1✽✽✽✽

NZ 00005~ 9

Rule 2✽✽✽

NZ 00000✽

Rule 3✽✽

3~ 900000✽✽

Rule 4✽✽

0~ 20000✽✽✽

Rule 1M1 M2 M3 M4 M5 X5 (5 ~ 9)

Rule 2M1 M2 M3 M4 X5 '4'

Rule 3M1 M2 M3 X4 X5 '3'

Rule 4M1 M2 X3 X4 X5 M3 (0 ~ 2)

Calculating the check character

●

Bar code function

5-13

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

• Modulus 11

a. Data characters are weighed from the right to the left, as,

example,1, 2, ..., 10, 1, 2 ... 10, 1, 2 and so forth. The sum of

the data character values is determined. (The symbol ‘-’ has a

character value of 10.)

b. A character having a character value equal to the remainder of

dividing the value determined in step a by 11 is the first check

character (C).

c. Data characters are weighed from the right to the left,

beginning with C, as, for example, 1, 2, ..., 9, 1, 2 ... , 9, 1, 2

and so forth. The sum of the data character values is

determined.

d. The character with a character value equal to the remainder of

dividing the value determined in step c by 11 is the second

check character (K).

• Modulus 16

a. The sum of the all characters including start and stop

characters values is determined. The following table shows the

conversion of character into value.

Value Character Value Character Value Charactr Value Character

00 1 1 2 2 3 3

44 5 5 6 6 7 7

88 9 9 10- 11$

12 : 13 / 14 . 15 +

16 A 17 B 18 C 19 D

b. The remainder X of deviding the value determined in step a

by 16 is determined. The remainder Y of subtracting the

remainder X from 16 is determined.

c. Convert the remainder Y into the character Z according to the

conversion table in a. The character Z is the check character.

• Modulus 43

a. The sum of the data character values is determined.

b. The character with a character value equal to the remainder of

dividing the value determined in step a by 43 is the check

character.

●

Bar code function

5-14 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

• Modulus 47

a. Data characters are weighed from the right to the left, as, for

example, 1, 2, ..., 20, 1, 2 ... 20, 1, 2 and so forth. The sum of

the data character values determined..

b. The character with a character value equal to the remainder of

dividing the value determined in step a by 47 is the first check

character (C).

c. Data characters are weighed from the right to the left,

beginning with C, as, for example, 1, 2, ..., 15, 1, 2 ... , 15, 1, 2

and so forth. The sum of the data character values is

determined.

d. The character with a character value equal to the remainder of

dividing the value found in step c by 47 is the second check

character (K).

• Modulus 103

a. The sum of the products of the data character values and

position values is determined. (The leftmost character has a

position value of 1.)

b. The start character value is added to the sum determined in

step a above.

c. The character with a character value equal to the remainder

of dividing the value determined in step c by 103 is the check

character.

●

After executing a BS command input immediately after bar

code data, printing starts from the position by one

character to the left of the currently set character pitch.

●

When a margin is specified, bar code data in the buffer is

cleared.

●

The element printing function prints bar codes by inputting

data element by element.

●

This function allows the user to print bar codes which are

not supported by the printer but are expressed by

combining elements. No HRI is printed, no check digit is

added, and a start or stop character is not added, since

data is input element by element.

●

The following show the codes expressing elements.

00H: Narrow bar

01H: Wide bar

02H: Narrow space

03H: Wide space

04H: Inter-character gap

Other

Element printing

●

Bar code function

5-15

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

[Example]

The following shows a BASIC program for printing Code 39 bar codes

using the element printing function. This example shows how to print

“CODE39”. (Replace NB, WB, NS and WS in the data statements in the

following example with 0, 1, 2 and 3, respectively.)

100 OPEN "LPT1:" AS #1: WIDTH #1,255

110 DC4$=CHR$ (&H14): ESC$=CHR$(&H1B)

120 SI$=CHR$(&HF):SO$=CHR$(&HE): ICG=4

130 '

140 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"@"; ' Initialize

150 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"T";CHR$(255); ' Barcode Type: Element Print

160 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"E";CHR$(0);CHR$(2); ' Narrow Bar: 2/120"

170 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"E";CHR$(1);CHR$(6); ' Wide Bar: 6/120"

180 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"E";CHR$(2);CHR$(2); ' Narrow Space: 2/120"

190 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"E";CHR$(3);CHR$(6); ' Wide Space: 6/120"

200 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"E";CHR$(4);CHR$(2); ' Inter Char Gap: 2/120"

210 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"H";CHR$(6); ' Barcode Height: 6/12"

220 '

230 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"B";CHR$(9*8+7); ' Barcode Data Sequence Start

240 RESTORE 440

250 FOR I=1 TO 9:READ A:PRINT CHR$(A);:NEXT I

260 PRINT #1, CHR$(ICG);

270 FOR J=1 TO 6

280 IF J=1 THEN RESTORE 450

290 IF J=2 THEN RESTORE 460

300 IF J=3 THEN RESTORE 470

310 IF J=4 THEN RESTORE 480

320 IF J=5 THEN RESTORE 490

330 IF J=6 THEN RESTORE 500

340 FOR I=1 TO 9:READ A: PRINT #1, CHR$(A);:NEXT I

350 PRINT #1, CHR$(ICG);

360 NEXT J

370 RESTORE 440

380 FOR I=1 TO 9:READ A: PRINT #1, CHR$(A);:NEXT I

400 PRINT #1,CHR$(13);CHR$(10); ' CR+LF

410 CLOSE #1

420 END

430 '

440 DATA 0, 3, 0, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 0

450 DATA 1, 2, 1, 2, 0, 3, 0, 2, 0

460 DATA 1, 2, 0, 2, 1, 2, 0, 3, 0

470 DATA 0, 2, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1

480 DATA 1, 2, 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 0

490 DATA 1, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 0, 2, 0

500 DATA 0, 2, 1, 3, 0, 2, 1 ,2, 0

Element printing

●

Bar code function

If #40 BARCODE/ENLARGED CHAR is set to MODE 1 or MODE 2

in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE, enlarged characters can be

printed. The enlarged character function is valid for the EPSON or

IBM or HP mode.

5-16

When the enlarged character mode is selected with the DC4 DC4 I 1

command, any commands other than those shown below are ignored.

Only three print codes are available: LF, CR and FF. If 521 or more

characters of data are sent without inputting a print command, printing

is performed automatically.

Function Command

1.

Executing backspacing

BS

2.

Executing line feeding

LF

3.

Executing form feeding

FF

4.

Executing carriage return

CR

5.

Initializing the enlarged character mode

DC4 DC4 @

6.

Arrangement of enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 a

7.

Element magnification for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 c

8.

All-character set for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 d

9.

Selecting an enlarged character font

DC4 DC4 f

10.

Height expansion for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 h

11.

HMI for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 i

12.

VMI for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 j

13.

Setting and canceling the enlarged character mode

DC4 DC4 l

14.

Enlarged character cell offset

DC4 DC4 o

15.

Enlarged character pitch

DC4 DC4 p

16.

Enlarged character quality

DC4 DC4 q

17.

Enlarged character rotational angle

DC4 DC4 r

18.

Setting and canceling enlarged character smoothing

DC4 DC4 s

19.

Enlarged character top offset

DC4 DC4 t

20.

Setting and canceling underscores for enlarged characters

DC4 DC4 u

21. Enlarged character width expansion DC4 DC4 w

22. Horizontal printing position for enlarged characters DC4 DC4 x

23. Vertical printing position for enlarged characters DC4 DC4 y

Outline of enlarged character function

Enlarged character command list

●

Enlarged character function

See page 3-36.

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

5-17

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(1) Executing backspacing: BS

Format: ASCII BS

Hex 08

Decimal 08

Function: Executes backspacing.

When the BS command is executed, the printing position moves to the

previous character position on the left. The BS command is valid up to the

left margin. A BS command issued on the left margin is ignored.

When a BS command is issued when there is a character on the left with

proportional printing selected, the printer backspaces to that character. If

there is no character or another BS command has just been executed, the

printer backspaces by one space.

The part moved by backspacing is not underscored.

(2) Executing line feeding: LF

Format: ASCII LF

Hex 0A

Decimal 10

Function: Executes line feeding.

After printing data, the printer feeds one line by the enlarged character line

feed pitch, which differs depending on whether VMI is valid (by the DC4

DC4 j command) or not.

VMI valid: Preset VMI amount

VMI not valid: (24 + cell offset)/180” x cell expansion

Line feeding involves a carriage return if the LF SETTING option is set to

LF + CR in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

If the bottom margin is specified and the cell size (i.e., 24/180” x cell

expansion) is greater than the printable area in the CSF, cut sheet, or

fanfold paper mode, form feeding is executed and then printing is executed.

If the printing position is at the TOF position, printing is executed up to the

bottom margin without executing form feeding, and excess data is not

printed.

The default pitch is “1/6” x cell expansion”.

●

Enlarged character function

5-18 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(3) Executing form feeding: FF

Format: ASCII FF

Hex 0C

Decimal 12

Function: Executes form feeding.

This command feeds the page to the next TOF position. If there are still enlarged

characters to be printed, they are printed, then form feeding is executed.

(4) Executing carriage return: CR

Format: ASCII CR

Hex 0D

Decimal 13

Function: Executes carriage return.

This command moves the printing position to the left margin without printing any

characters. If the CR SETTING option is set to CR + LF in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE, a carriage return is executed out after printing.

(5) Initializing the enlarged character mode: DC4 DC4 @

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 @

Hex 14 14 40

Decimal 20 20 64

Function: Initializes the enlarged character mode.

The following show the default settings for enlarged characters:

Cell expansion: SETUP expansion

Height expansion: SETUP expansion

Width expansion: SETUP expansion

Font: SETUP font

Character pitch: 10 cpi

HMI: Invalid

Cell offset: 6/180”

VMI: Invalid

Character quality: Standard

Character layout: Adjusted to the base line

Rotational angle: 0°

Smoothing: Valid

Top offset: 0/180”

Underscore: Canceled

Character set: Set at enlarged character mode selected

Right and left margins: Margin at enlarged character mode selected

Page length: Length at enlarged character mode selected

Top and bottom margins: Margin at enlarged character mode selected

●

Enlarged character function

5-19

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(6) Arrangement of enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 a

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 an

Hex 14 14 61 n

Decimal 20 20 97 n

Function: Specifies the standard position for adjusting enlarged characters

in the vertical direction.

n = 00H,30H: Base line is adjusted to the N’th dot from the top.

(N = 20 x cell expansion)

01H,31H: Descender is adjusted to the N’th dot from the top.

(N = 24 x cell expansion)

02H,32H: Center is adjusted to the N’th dot from the top.

(N = 12 x cell expansion)

03H,33H: Ascender is adjusted to the N’th dot from the top.

(N = 1 x cell expansion)

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any parameters other than those

shown above are ignored.

The arrangement and position specified here are valid if the enlarged

character rotational angle is not 0 degree. The default setting is n =

00H,30H.

(7) Cell expansion for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 c

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 cn

Hex 14 14 63 n

Decimal 20 20 99 n

Function: Specifies cell expansion for enlarged characters.

0

≤

n

≤

127

The cell has the size of (24/180” x cell magnification). The MSB of the

parameter is masked.

If n = 0, the expansion specified in the setup mode is selected.

The cell expansion is specified at the beginning of the line. If there is

character data on the line, it becomes valid on the following line.

Enlarged character cell expansion takes priority over the height expansion.

If the height expansion exceeds cell expansion when enlarged character

data is input, the characters are enlarged to the cell expansion value.

The default setting is the expansion specified in the setup mode.

●

Enlarged character function

5-20 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(8) All-character set for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 d

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 d n d1 d2...dn

Hex 14 14 64 n d1 d2...dh

Decimal 20 20 100 n d1 d2...dn

Function: Specifies the all-character set for enlarged characters.

1

≤

n

≤

255

0

≤

d

≤

255

Data with a number specified with the parameter “n” is processed as

character codes. If n = 0, this sequence is ignored.

(9) Selecting an enlarged character font: DC4 DC4 f

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 fn

Hex 14 14 66 n

Decimal 20 20 102 n

Function: Specifies the font (typeface) of enlarged characters as shown

below.

n = 0: Roman

1: Sans serif

2: Courier

3: Prestige

4: Script

5: OCT-B

6: OCR-A

7: Gothic

8: Orator

9: Orator-S

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any parameters other than those

shown above are ignored.

If the FONT LOCK option is set to YES in the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, this command is ignored.

The default is the setting selected in the setup mode.

●

Enlarged character function

5-21

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(10) Height expansion for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 h

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 hn

Hex 14 14 68 n

Decimal 20 20 104 n

Function: Specifies the height expansion of enlarged characters.

0

≤

n

≤

127

The MSB of the parameter is masked.

If n = 0, the expansion specified in the setup mode is selected.

Enlarged character cell expansion takes priority over height expansion. If

the height expansion exceeds the cell expansion when enlarged character

data is input, the characters are enlarged to the cell expansion.

The default expansion is specified in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

(11) HMI for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 i

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 i n1 n2

Hex 14 14 69 n1 n2

Decimal 20 20 105 n1n2

Function: Specifies the HMI (horizontal motion index) of enlarged

characters.

0

≤

n1

≤

255

0

≤

n2

≤

15

The HMI indicates the horizontal distance between two adjacent characters,

i.e., the width the print head moves after printing one character.

The HMI is (n1 + n2 x 256)/180”.

The high-order four bits of parameter n2 (bit 7 to bit 4) are ignored. The

HMI can be set to zero.

After specifed command have priority over DC4 DC4 p or DC4 DC4 i.

If the PITCH LOCK option is set to YES in the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, this command is ignored.

The default setting is “10 cpi x widthwise expansion”.

●

Enlarged character function

5-22 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(12) VMI for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 j

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 j n1 n2

Hex 14 14 6A n1 n2

Decimal 20 20 106 n1 n2

Function: Specifies the VMI (vertical motion index) of enlarged

characters.

0

≤

n1

≤

255

0

≤

n2

≤

127

The VMI indicates the distance between two lines, i.e., the length the print

head moves after printing one line.

The VMI is (n1 + n2 x 256)/180”. The MSB of parameter n2 is masked.

The VMI can be set to zero.

The VMI is not dependent on the length expansion of enlarged characters.

After specifed command have priority over DC4 DC4 j or DC4 DC4 o.

The VMI is invalid and the cell offset 6 line feed pitch is selected (i.e., 1/6”

x cell expansion) by default.

(13) Setting and canceling the enlarged character mode: DC4 DC4 l

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 ln

Hex 14 14 6c n

Decimal 20 20 108 n

Function: Sets and cancels the enlarged character mode.

n = 00H,30H: Cancels the enlarged character mode.

01H,31H: Sets the enlarged character mode.

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

When the enlarged character mode establish command is issued, the special

effects, character pitch, line feed pitch, length and width double-size

printing settings specified for the emulation become invalid the enlarged

character mode is canceled.

When the enlarged character mode starts, characters are printed in the

conditions selected when the enlarged character mode was last canceled.

If there are non-enlarged characters or bar codes when enlarge character

data is input the non-enlarged character are printed.

In the enlarged character mode, automatic printing is not performed if the

printing position exceeds the right margin. Excess data is abandoned and

the printing position is set at the right margin when the right margin is

exceeded.

If the right margin is exceeded while a single enlarged character is being

printed, the character is printed up to the right margin.

●

Enlarged character function

5-23

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(14) Enlarged character cell offset: DC4 DC4 o

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 on

Hex 14 14 6f n

Decimal 20 20 111 n

Function: Specifies the cell offset for enlarged characters.

0

≤

n

≤

255

This command specifies the cell offset for the enlarged characters in 1/180”.

The cell offset is used to execute a line feed (LF) command.

In the enlarged character mode, the line is fed by a pitch of (24 + cell

offset)/180” x cell expansion.

The VMI is invalid and the cell offset is 6 by default.

(15) Enlarged character pitch: DC4 DC4 p

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 pn

Hex 14 14 70 n

Decimal 20 20 112 n

Function: Specifies the pitch of enlarged characters.

n = 00H,30H: 10 cpi

01H,31H: 12 cpi

02H,32H: Proportional

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

If the fixed pitch is selected, enlarged characters have the following width:

10 cpi: (18 ×180”) x widthwise expansion

12 cpi: (15 ×180”) x widthwise expansion

In the proportional mode, proportional characters are expanded by the same

ratio.

When the rotational angle for enlarged characters is set to 90 or 270 degrees,

characters other than graphic character are printed at a pitch of (24/180”) x

length expansion. If the PITCH LOCK option is set to YES in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, this command is ignored.

The HMI is invalidated and the character pitch is 10 cpi by default.

●

Enlarged character function

5-24 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(16) Enlarged character quality: DC4 DC4 q

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 qn

Hex 14 14 71 n

Decimal 20 20 113 n

Function: Specifies the quality of enlarged characters as shown below.

n = 00H,30H: Standard quality

01H,31H: High-speed 1 quality

02H,32H: High-speed 2 quality

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

The character quality is specified at the beginning of a line. If there is

character data on the line, this command is reserved and becomes valid on

the following line.

If the QUALITY LOCK option is set to YES in the EXTENDED SETUP

MODE, this command is ignored.

The standard quality is selected by default.

(17) Enlarged character rotational angle: DC4 DC4 r

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 rn

Hex 14 14 72 n

Decimal 20 20 114 n

Function: Specifies the rotational angle of enlarged characters as shown

below.

n = 00H,30H 0°

01H, 31H 90°

02H, 32H 180°

03H, 33H 270°

Enlarged characters are rotated counterclockwise.

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

Printing starts from the position specified with the DC4 DC4 a command

shown above.

Unless the rotational angle is set to 0 degree, no characters are underscored

even when underscores are input.

Pixels are printed at a rotational angle of 0 degree even if the rotational

angle is set to 90, 180, or 270 degrees.

This command is ignored if the PITCH LOCK option is set to YES in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE and the length and width expansion values of

enlarged characters are different.

The default rotational angle is 0 degree.

●

Enlarged character function

5-25

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(18) Setting and canceling enlarged character smoothing: DC4 DC4 s

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 sn

Hex 14 14 73 n

Decimal 20 20 115 n

Function: Sets and cancels smoothing of enlarged characters.

n = 00H,30H: Cancels smoothing.

01H,31H: Sets smoothing.

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

Smoothing is set by default.

(19) Enlarged character top offset: DC4 DC4 t

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 t m n1 n2

Hex 14 14 74 mn1 n2

Decimal 20 20 116 mn1n2

Function: Specifies the top offset of enlarged characters.

m = (20)H

0

≤

n1

≤

255

0

≤

n1

≤

15

The top offset refers to the vertical distance between the top of the cell and

the top of a character. This determines the character position in the cell.

It is specified by (n1 + n2 x 256)/180”.

The high-order four bits of parameter n2 (bit 7 to bit 4) are masked.

The top offset is effective for only one characterafter this sequence.

The top offset is canceled when a line feed (LF) command, form feed (FF)

command, or vertical print position (DC4 DC4 y) command is issued.

The top offset is not dependent on the enlarged character arrangement.

It is always based on the top of the cell (corresponding to the ascender-

based position).

The top offset is not dependent on cell expansion or length expansion.

The bottom of a character (i.e., 24th pin position, regardless of character

type, even for a 30-dot pixel) does not extend beyond the bottom of the cell.

If the top offset is too large and the bottom of the character extends below

the bottom of the cell, the top offset is reduced.

Any sequences other than m = 20H are ignored.

●

Enlarged character function

5-26 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

(20) Setting and canceling underscores for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 u

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 un

Hex 14 14 75 n

Decimal 20 20 117 n

Function: Sets and cancels the underscore function.

n = 00H,30H: Cancels underscoring.

01H,31H: Specifies the underscoring.

The MSB of the parameter is masked. Any sequences other than the above

parameters are ignored.

An underscore is drawn on the 25th pin line at a thickness of (1 dot x length

expansion of the character).

No underscores are printed if the enlarged character rotational angle is not

set to 0 degree. Underscoring is off by default.

(21) Enlarged character width expansion: DC4 DC4 w

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 wn

Hex 14 14 77 n

Decimal 20 20 119 n

Function: Specifies the width expansion of enlarged characters.

0

≤

n

≤

127

The MSB of the parameter is masked.

If n is set to 0, the magnification specified in the setup mode is selected.

This command is ignored if the PITCH LOCK option is set to YES in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

The expansion specified in the setup mode is set by default.

(22) Horizontal printing position for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 x

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 x m n1 n2

Hex 14 14 78 mn1 n2

Decimal 20 20 120 mn1n2

Function: Specifies the horizontal position for printing enlarged

characters by (n1 + n2 x 256)/180” as shown below.

m = SP(20)H: Absolute printing position

-(2D)H: Relative lefthand printing position

+(2B)H: Relative righthand printing position

0

≤

n1

≤

255

0

≤

n2

≤

15

The MSB of parameter m and the four high-order bits of n2 (bit 7 to bit 4)

are masked.

●

Enlarged character function

5-27

— 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

If parameter m is different than shown above, this sequence is ignored.

The absolute print position is based on the left margin. If the specified

position exceeds the right margin, the print position is located at the right

margin.

If a relative lefthand printing position to the left of the left margin is

specified, left margin becomes the printing position.

If a relative righthand printing position to the right of the right margin is

specified, the right margin becomes the printing position.

The movement distance is not dependent on the width expansion of

enlarged characters.

(23) Vertical printing position for enlarged characters: DC4 DC4 y

Format: ASCII DC4 DC4 y m n1 n2

Hex 14 14 79 mn1n2

Decimal 20 20 121 mn1n2

Function: Specifies the vertical position for printing enlarged characters

by (n1 + n2 x 256)/180” as shown below.

m = SP(20)H: Absolute printing position

-(2D)H: Relative reverse printing position

+(2B)H: Relative forward printing position

0

≤

n1

≤

255

0

≤

n2

≤

127

The MSBs of parameters m and n2 are masked. If parameter m is other

than shown above, this sequence is ignored.

The absolute print position is based on the TOF position. If the specified

position extends below the bottom margin, the bottom margin becomes the

print position.

If a relative reverse printing position exceeding the TOF position is

specified, the TOF position becomes the print position.

If a relative forward printing position that extends below the bottom margin

is specified, the print position is located at the bottom margin.

The movement distance is not dependent on the length expansion of

enlarged characters.

●

Enlarged character function

5-28 — 5. Bar code and enlarged character function —

This page shows examples of a BASIC program for printing enlarged

characters and the printed enlarged characters (actual size).

100 OPEN "LPT1:"AS #1

110 DC4$=CHR$(&H14)

120 '

130 PRINT #1, DC4$;DC4$;"@"; '

Initializing

140 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"c";CHR$(8); '

Magnification of cell: x8

150 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"f";CHR$(4); '

Font typeface: SCRIPT

160 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"p";CHR$(1); '

Character pitch: 12 CPI

170 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"l";CHR$(1); '

Magnification mode on

180 '

190 PRINT #1,"8"; '

Default size print

200 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"h";CHR$(2); ' Vertical magnification: x2

210 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"w";CHR$(2); '

Horizontal magnification: x2

220 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"a";CHR$(3); '

Alignment: ascender

230 PRINT #1,"ASCE";

240 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"a";CHR$(2); '

Alignment: center

250 PRINT #1,"CENT";

260 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"a";CHR$(1); '

Alignment: descender

270 PRINT #1,"DESC";

280 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"a";CHR$(0); '

Alignment: baseline

290 PRINT #1,"BASE";

300 '

310 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"w";CHR$(8); '

Horizontal magnification: x8

320 PRINT #1,"H";

330 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"w";CHR$(1); '

Horizontal magnification: x1

340 FOR N=1 TO 8

350 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"h";CHR$(N); '

Vertical magnification: xn

360 PRINT #1,RIGHT$;(STR$(N),1); '

370 NEXT N

380 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"w";CHR$(8); ' Horizontal magnification: x8

390 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"r";CHR$(1); '

Rotate: 90 degree

400 PRINT #1,

"R"

;

410 PRINT #1,CHR$;(13);CHR$(10); ' CR+LF

420 '

430 PRINT #1,DC4$;DC4$;"l";CHR$(0); '

Magnification mode off

440 CLOSE #1

450 END

●

Enlarged character function

Enlarged character print samples

6.Troubleshooting

6-1

— 6. Troubleshooting —

When a funtional error occurs, the ERROR lamp blinks and

the buzzer sounds for five seconds. In this case, turn off the

power once and remove the cause of the error.

When the printer is used for continuous printing, its protective function may be

invoked to prevent malfunctions. If the printer does not recover from a functional

error, please contact the dealer.

Functional error messages (displayed on the LCD)

CARRIAGE ERROR

NO LCD DISPLAY

The error lamp blinks and the

buzzer sounds immediately

after turning the power on or

after the printer is reset.

FAN ERROR

CARRIAGE ERROR

• The print head is not in place.

Check whether the ribbon or paper was caught by the

print head. Recheck the paper thickness adjustment.

FAN ERROR

• The fan for cooling the internal circuits stopped.

Turn off the power, then turn it back on. If the printer

does not recover from the error, contact the dealer.

INTERNAL RAM ERROR

• An error occurred in the internal RAM.

Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If the print-

er does not recover from the error, contact the dealer.

F.S. ERROR

T.S. ERROR

F.S. ERROR

• An error occurred in the paper ejection mechanism.

Detach the rear cover, and check whether or not paper is jammed

in the paper ejection mechanism in the back of the printer.

Remove any paper, turn off the power, and turn it on again. If the

printer does not recover from the error, contact the dealer.

T.S. ERROR

• An error occurred in the paper path switching mechanism.

Remove all paper. Turn the power on and off several

times.

Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If the printer

does not recover from the error, contact the dealer.

HEAD ADJUSTMENT ERROR 1

• The print head was not adjusted to the standard position after head

adjustment motion.

Turn off the power and then turn it back on. If the

printer does not recover from the error, contact the

dealer.

HAI.S. ERROR

●

Error messages and countermeasures

6-2 — 6. Troubleshooting —

HOME S. ERROR

HEAD ADJUSTMENT ERROR 2

•Contact of the print head with the platen or paper when the print head

moved from the standard position toward the platen during head

adjustment was not confirmed.

Turn off the power then turn it back on. If the printer

does not recover from the error, contact the dealer.

HOME SENSE ERROR

• The home position cannot be detected properly when home sensing is

executed.

Check whether the ribbon or paper has been caught by

the print head. Recheck the paper thickness adjustment.

PLEASE POWER OFF ABNORMAL CURRENT ERROR

• An abnormal current was detected.

The printer is automatically turned off after five

seconds. Stop using the printer, and contact the dealer.

PARK ERROR PAPER PARK ERROR

•This error message indicates that fanfold paper is not being retracted

properly. The ERROR lamp blinks, the buzzer sounds three times,

and the printer enters the offline state.

Check whether paper is jammed in the paper ejection

mechanism. This error occurs when paper that cannot

be retracted though reverse feeding motion is printed

for approximately three pages. If three pages or more

have been printed, keep the REVERSE LF key depressed

to move back the paper.

HEAD PROTECTION PRINT HEAD COOLING

• The print head is being cooled to prevent it from overheating.

The ONLINE lamp blinks.

The print head has become too hot during high-density

printing. When this message is displayed, the printing

speed is reduced or printing stops. When the print head

temperature drops, the printer restarts printing.

HA.S. ERROR

Operational error messages (displayed on the LCD)

●

Error messages and countermeasures

6-3

— 6. Troubleshooting —

PAPER OUT: F.TR.

PAPER OUT: R. TR.

SET PAPER

PAPER OUT: CSF

Front Tractor

Rear Tractor

Manual

CSF

OUT-OF-PAPER ERROR

• This error message indicates that paper feeding has failed in the CSF

mode or that no paper is set in the fanfold paper or manual paper

loading mode. The ERROR lamp lights, the buzzer sounds for one

second, and the printer enters the offline state.

The ONLINE, PAPER PATH, EJECT/LOAD, FORM FEED, LINE

FEED and other keys are effective. Resetting is also effective.

ONLINE key

If there is still print data, paper is fed. If paper is fed properly,

the out-of-paper condition is reset and the printer enters the

online state. If paper is not fed properly, the printer remains in

the out-of-paper condition.

If there is no print data, the out-of-paper condition is

reset and the printer enters the online state.

PAPER PATH key

Press the PAPER PATH key to change the paper path.

The out-of-paper condition is reset and the printer

enters the online state.

EJECT/LOAD, FORM FEED and LINE FEED

keys

If paper is fed properly, the no-paper condition is reset

and the printer enters the previous (online or offline )

state.

If manual feeding is selected, paper is fed only

when the paper sensor detects paper. Paper is not fed

by pressing the key.

PAPER JAM : F.TR.

PAPER JAM : R.TR.

SET PAPER AGAIN

REMOVE PAPER

Front Tractor

Rear Tractor

When paper insertion has failed

When paper ejection has failed

PAPER JAM ERROR

• This error occurs when fanfold paper is not fed properly, manually-

loaded or CSF-loaded paper is not ejected properly, or paper is not

properly manually loaded from the front or rear. The ERROR lamp

lights, and the buzzer sounds three times.

The LINE FEED and REVERSE LF keys are effective.

Remove jammed paper using these keys or by hand.

The ONLINE key is also effective. When "PAPER JAM"

is displayed, pressing the ONLINE key will clear the

error status.

The paper jam sensor may not function properly if the

sensor is exposed to a direct light or sunlight.

●

Error messages and countermeasures

6-4 — 6. Troubleshooting —

PAPER IS SKEWED

•This error occurs if the printer detects that cut sheet paper was loaded

on the skew manually. The ERROR lamp blinks, and the buzzer

sounds three times. The paper is ejected and the printer enters the

offline state.

Load paper again. If it is loaded straight, the printer

enters the online state.

SKEW ERROR

COVER OPEN ERROR

•This error occurrs if the front cover is opened. The ERROR lamp

lights, and the ONLINE lamp blinks.

Closing the front cover will remove the cause of this

error. The printer is in the offline state while the cover

is opened.

FRONT COVER OPEN

PAPER PATH ERROR

•This error occurs in paper feeding if the cover that should be opened is

not open or the cover that should be closed is not closed. The ERROR

lamp lights, and the buzzer sounds three times, and the printer enters

the offline state.

The printer is recovered from this error and enters the

previous online or offline state by opening or closing the

cover, properly according to the message displayed on

the LCD.

OPEN TOP COVER

CLOSE REAR COVER

OPEN REAR COVER

OPEN PAPER RACK

Single Sheet Top Out

Single Sheet Top Out

Fanfold Top Out

Single Sheet or Rear Tractor

HEAD ADJUSTING ERROR

•This error occurs if the print head contacts the paper but cannot move

to the specified position after paper is loaded in the fixed paper

thickness mode. The ERROR lamp lights, and the buzzer sounds

three times, and the printer enters the offline state.

The current HEAD ADJUSTMENT setting is dispalyed

by pressing the SET UP key. Change the click position

with the or key and press the ENTER key to

move the print head to the currently set position. If the

print head moves properly, the printer will enter the

offline state. If the print head fails to move properly, the

error message reappears.

H.ADJ: FIX ERROR

PRESS SETUP

FIX: +10CLICK

These messages are

displayed alternately at 3

second interval.

●

Error messages and countermeasures

6-5

— 6. Troubleshooting —

JAM SENSOR ERROR

• The jam sensor was found defective when loading fanfold paper.

The ERROR lamp lights, and the buzzer sounds three times, and the

printer enters the offline state.

Press the ONLINE key to recover the printer from this

error. The paper jam detection function is disabled.

Remove paper dust from the jam sensor, and load

fanfold paper again.

FLAP SWITCHING ERROR

•This error occurs if the flap is not located at the proper position.

The ERROR lamp lights, and the buzzer sounds three times, and the

printer enters the offline state.

Any keys are ignored except the ONLINE key. When the

rear paper is removed and the ONLINE key is pressed,

the paper path is changed. When this operation is

completed properly, the printer enters the previous

online or offline state.

REMOVE REAR PAP.

JAM.S LEVEL ERR

PRESS ONLINE SW

These messages are

displayed alternately at 3

second interval.

*1) When the head adjustment is not appropriate,

(1) In the AUTO mode:

Specify the appropriate head adjustment again in the range from -2 to +5. When the appropriate

head adjustment cannot be set, carry out this setting in the FIX mode.

(2) In the FIX mode:

Specify the appropriate head adjustment again.

(3) When the appropriate head adjustment cannot be specified, the head adjustment mechanism is

faulty. Have it replaced by the dealer.

6-6 — 6. Troubleshooting —

●

Troubleshooting

Cause and Solution

• Power cord not connected.

• Malfunction of the power supply in the

printer

Contact the dealer.

• The paper sensor is clogged by paper dust.

Clean the paper sensor.

• Malfunction of the paper sensor

Contact the dealer.

• The print head has overheated.

Wait until it has cooled down.

• Head adjustment is not set correctly. (*1)

• The print head may need to be replaced.

• Ribbon cassette may need to be replaced.

• Head adjustment is not set correctly. (*1)

• Ribbon cassette is not properly installed.

• The print head may need to be replaced.

• Check whether the cable connection is faulty

or broken.

• Host system control and data code may not

match the printer's setup.

• Check the emulation setting of the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

• Adjust with the vertical alignment function.

• The print head may need to be replaced.

• Stack of fanfold paper to be fed is placed

beside the printer crookedly.

• The automatic carriage return option in the

extended setup options is set incorrectly.

• Change the setting of #27 CR SETTING on

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

Symptoms

POWER lamp fails to

light.

Error lamp does not

light.(Out-of-paper

error not detected.)

Printer stops or slows

down on printing.

Poor quality printing

Smudging of the paper

Incorrect character

printed

Print position gap

occurs over bar code

or vertical line.

Fanfold paper slips

Extra line feed

See page 1-1.

See page 3-9.

See page 6-3.

See page 3-9.

See page 4-6.

See page 1-12.

See page 3-27.

See page 6-3.

See page 1-2.

●

Troubleshooting

6-7

— 6. Troubleshooting —

Cause and Solution

• Paper is curled. Carefully remove the jammed

paper.

• Head adjustment is not set correctly. (*1)

• Push down the lock lever of tractors to the

LOCK position.

• When using the printer in an environment

where it is exposed to a direct light or

sunlight, make sure that the paper jam sensor

is not directly exposed to the light.

• There is some obstruction in the paper path or

ejection path.

• The paper jam sensor is clogged by paper

dust. Clean the paper jam sensor. (*2)

• Malfunction of the paper jam sensor

Contact the dealer.

• Paper jam detection is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE. Change the

setting of #65 PAPER JAM DETECTION.

• The skew sensor is clogged by paper dust.

Clean the skew sensor. (*2)

• Malfunction of the skew sensor

Contact the dealer.

• Skew detection is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE. Change the

setting of #64 SKEW DETECTION.

• Turn the power on and off several times.

• Malfunction of the flap mechanism

Contact the dealer.

• Turn the power on and off several times.

• Malfunction of the tractor mechanism

Contact the dealer.

• The paper ejection path is not set properly.

Set the proper ejection path using the PAPER

PATH key or #61 PAPER PATH on the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

• Upward ejection cannot be used when paper

that has a short page length (150 mm or less)

is being used.

Symptoms

Paper jam

Paper jam is not

detected.

Paper is skewed.

Skewing is not

detected.

Flap will not change

Tractor mode cannot

be changed

Paper is not ejected

to the top.

See page xiii.

See page 3-44.

See page 6-1.

See page 6-1.

See page 3-42.

See page 3-43.

*2) How to clean the paper jam sensor and skew sensor cover

After switching the power off, remove the ink ribbon and clean these sensors using a vacuum

cleaner or cotton-swab.

See page xiii.

7. Interface specifications

7-1

— 7. Interface specifications —

Bidirectional (IEEE1284. Nibble mode) is available.

Parallel interface

PIN SIGNAL IN/OUT PIN SIGNAL IN/OUT

1 STROBE * IN 19 GND

2 DATA 1 IN 20 GND

3 DATA 2 IN 21 GND

4 DATA 3 IN 22 GND

5 DATA 4 IN 23 GND

6 DATA 5 IN 24 GND

7 DATA 6 IN 25 GND

8 DATA 7 IN 26 GND

9 DATA 8 IN 27 GND

10 ACK * OUT 28 GND

11 BUSY OUT 29 GND

12 PE OUT 30 GND

13 SELECT OUT 31 INITIAL * IN

14 AUTO FEED * IN 32 ERROR * OUT

15 NC 33 GND

16 GND 34 NC

17 GHASSIS GND 35 HIGH OUT

18 +5V OUT 36 SELECT IN * IN

(1) The signals marked with asterisks are negative logic signals.

(2) The High level is raised to +5 V with a 2.2 kΩresistor.

(3) NC means "not connected".

(4) The CHASSIS GND and GND are connected inside the

printer.

Pin configuration

Input connector (36-pin parallel )

18 1416 12 10 8 6 4 217 1315 11 9 7 5 3 1

36 3234 30 28 26 24 22 2035 3133 29 27 25 23 21 19

●Parallel interface

7-2 — 7. Interface specifications —

1~50µs1µs

(MIN) 1µs

(MIN) 7~10µs

4~6µs 4~6µs

ATA 1~8

BUSY

TROBE

ACK

0µs

(MIN)

1µs

(MAX)

INITIAL

BUSY

ACK 50µs

(MAX)

50µs(MIN) 4~6µs

7~10µs

4~6µs

Data Input

Initialization

Timing chart

+5V

2.2K Ω

To printer (74LS04

or equivalent)

Input Terminal

• DATA1 ~ DATA8

• AUTO FEED

• SELECT IN

+5V

To printer

100 Ω

330pF

(74LS14

or equivalent)

• STROBE

2.2K Ω

• INITIAL +5V

To printer

100 Ω

1000pF

(74LS14

or equivalent)

2.2K Ω

All signals are TTL-level signals.

HIGH LEVEL 2.4 ~ 5.0 V

LOW LEVEL 0 ~ 0.4 V

At the input terminals

of the printer

Input Terminal

Input Terminal

+5V

2.2K Ω

To printer (7406,7407

or equivalent)

Output

Terminal

• BUSY

• ACK

• PE

• ERROR

• SELECT

Input/output conditions

Input Signals Output Signals

●Parallel interface

[DATA1 to DATA8]

Each of these signals is an 8-bit data signal. It is high

when the signal is logic 1 and low when the signal is

logic 0. DATA1 is the LSB, and DATA8 is the MSB.

[STROBE]

This is a strobe signal for reading an 8-bit data signal.

Data is read in at the falling or rising edge of the

STROBE signal.

[INITIAL]

This signal initializes the printer to the state in which the

printer starts up when the power is turned on. It is

normally high. When it is set to low, the printer is reset.

When it is set to high again, the printer is initialized.

[AUTO FEED]

If this signal is set to low when #27 CR SETTING is set

to AUTOFEED in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE, line

feeding is performed when the CR command is executed.

In the HP mode or IBM mode, it is possible to specify

whether to perform line feeding after executing the CR

command by using the software command, regardless of

the settings of this signal and #27 CR SETTING in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

[SELECT IN]

When this signal is set to high, the control code is

validated. Validity of this signal is specified in the

extended setup mode. In the HP mode, this signal setting

is ignored.

7-3

— 7. Interface specifications —

Signal explanations

Input signals to the printer

See page 3-53.

See page 3-29.

See page 3-53.

See page 3-47.

Each signal wire must be 2 meters or less in

length. It is recommended that a twisted pair

of signal and GND wires be used.

[BUSY]

This signal indicates that the printer is in the busy state.

While it is high, no external data is accepted.

This signal is set to high in any of the following cases:

(1) Initialization is being performed.

(2) The STROBE signal is issued and data is input.

(3) The self-test printing is being performed.

(4) The printer is in the offline state.

(5) The printer cover is open.

(6) The printer is in an error state.

[ACK]This signal is output at the falling edge of the BUSY

signal which was set high by the STROBE signal. No

ACK signal is output in cases (4), (5), (6) above.

[PE] This signal is set high when no paper is detected. It is set

low when paper is detected.

[ERROR]

This signal is set low when an out-of-paper error or other

error occurs in the IBM mode.

It is set low when printer is in the offline state, in

addition to the errors noted above, in the EPSON mode.

This signal is set low when the functional error occurs in

the HP mode.

[SELECT]

This signal is always set high in the EPSON mode.

In the IBM mode, it is set low when an out-of-paper

error, paper error or functional error occurs, the printer

cover is opened, the printer is in the offline state, or the

deselect command (ESC + Q + (23)H or (B9)H) is

executed. It is set high when the printer is in the online

state with the ONLINE key or the DC1 (select) command

is executed.

In the HP mode, this signal is set low when the printer is

in the offline state. It is set high when the printer is in

the online state.

●Parallel interface

7-4 — 7. Interface specifications —

Output signals from

the printer

See page 3-53.

See page 6-3.

When #84 ERROR STATUS is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, PE signal is always set to low

and ERROR and SELECT signals are always set to high.

●Serial interface

7-5

— 7. Interface specifications —

Serial interface

Pin configuration

Input connector (25-pin serial connector)

13245678910111213

15 1416171819202122232425

PIN SIGNAL IN/OUT PIN SIGNAL IN/OUT

1 CHASSIS GND 14 NC

2 TXD OUT 15 NC

3 RXD IN 16 NC

4 RTS OUT 17 NC

5 CTS IN 18 NC

6 DSR IN 19 NC

7 SIGNAL GND 20 DTR OUT

8CD IN21NC

9NC 22NC

10 NC 23 NC

11 SRTS OUT 24 NC

12 NC 25 NC

13 NC

To printer

INPUT

330pF

(75189 or equivalent)

To printer

OUTPUT (75188 or equivalent)

Signal levels

OFF: Indicates "MARK" at a level from -3 to -15 V.

ON: Indicates "SPACE" at a level from +3 to +15 V.

Input signal

Output signal

Input/output conditions

(1) NC means "not connected".

(2) The CHASSIS GND and SIGNAL GND are connected inside

the printer.

[RXD (Receive data)]

Serial input data, which consists of a start bit, data bits,

(parity bit), and stop bit.

The data length (7 or 8 bits), use of the parity bit, and

even or odd parity are specified in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

[CTS (Clear to send)]

A data transmission control signal, which indicates that

data can be sent to the computer.

Whether or not to use this signal to control data

transmission is specified in the setup mode. This signal

is not used by default.

If the X-ON/X-OFF or ETX/ACK protocol is selected

and the CTS ENABLE option is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, the printer outputs data to the

computer, regardless of this signal setting.

If the X-ON/X-OFF or ETX/ACK protocol is selected

and the CTS ENABLE option is set to YES in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE, the printer outputs data to the

computer according to this signal setting.

[DSR (Data set ready)]

This signal indicates the state of the modem or computer.

If data is sent to the printer when this signal is ON, the

data is processed as valid data.

Data received when this signal is OFF is ignored as

invalid data.

By default, this signal is not used, and all data sent by the

computer is processed as valid data (i.e., the default

setting causes the same operation as when the DSR

signal is ON). Whether or not to use this signal for

control is selected in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

●Serial interface

7-6 — 7. Interface specifications —

See pages 3-47 and 3-48.

See page 3-50.

See page 3-51.

Input signals to the printer

●Serial interface

[CD (Carrier detect)]

This signal indicates whether the modem is connected

with the communication line. If data is sent to the printer

when this signal is active, the data is processed as valid

data. Data received when this signal is inactive is

ignored as invalid data.

By default, this signal is not used, and all data sent by the

computer is processed as valid data (i.e., the default

setting causes the same operation as when the CD signal

is active). Whether or not to use this signal for control is

selected in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

[TXD (Transmit data)]

Serial output data.

X-ON, X-OFF and ACK signals are output.

The data format is the same as the received data format.

[RTS (Request to send)]

Always held active (space).

[SRTS]

This signal indicates that the printer is ready or busy.

OFF : Indicates that the printer is busy and printer is in

the offline state. Data transmission to the printer is

disabled.

ON : Indicates that the printer is ready and data can be

transmitted to the printer.

This signal is always ON when X-ON/X-OFF( Ι )or( Π )or

the ETX/ACK protocol is selected.

[DTR (Data terminal ready)]

This signal indicates that the printer is ready or busy.

OFF: Indicates that the printer is busy and printer is in the

offline state. Data transmission to the printer is

disabled.

ON: Indicates that the printer is ready and data can be

transmitted to the printer.

This signal is always ON when X-ON/X-OFF (I) or (II) or

the ETX/ACK protocol is selected.

7-7

— 7. Interface specifications —

See page 3-51.

Output signals from the printer

Any of four handshaking protocols is selected in the

extended setup mode.

- DTR protocol

- X-ON/X-OFF (I) protocol

- X-ON/X-OFF (II) protocol

- ETX/ACK protocol

Control of these serial protocols is based on the free area in the data

buffer. There are two protocol control points based on the data buffer:

CIN, where the ready state changes to the busy state, and CRN, where

the busy state changes to the ready state. The values of these points are

shown below.

When 512KB or 8KB buffer size is selected,

CIN: 1KB

CRN: 2KB

When 128-byte buffer size is selected,

CIN: 32 bytes

CRN: 64 bytes

When the free space in the data buffer is reduced below the CIN value,

the printer enter the busy state and remains there until the free space

exceeds the CRN value. When the free space exceeds the CRN value,

the printer enters the ready state.

In this protocol, the printer state is indicated by the SRTS signal

(pin No. 11) and DTR signal (pin No. 20).

When the printer is ready, each signal goes ON (+12 V). When

the printer is busy or in the offline state, each signal goes OFF

(-12 V).

When the printer is busy or in the offline state, the computer does

not send data.

However, data from the computer can be received when the

printer is busy or in the offline state.

(1) When the power is turned on,

The SRTS and DTR signals go ready when data input is

enabled on completion of initialization after turning on

the power.

●Serial interface

7-8 — 7. Interface specifications —

Handshaking protocol

See page 3-49.

DTR (READY/BUSY) Protocol

●Serial interface

In this protocol, the printer sends the X-ON(11)H and X-

OFF(13)H codes to the computer to indicate the printer state.

In the X-ON/X-OFF protocol, the printer sends X-OFF(13)H to

the computer once when the ready state changes to the busy or

offline state, once when 64 bytes of data have been received

since this point in time, and once when the free area in the buffer

becomes zero.

The printer sends X-ON(11)H once to the computer when the

busy or offline state changes to the ready state or the power is

turned on. If the ONLINE key is pressed in the offline state and

the free space in the buffer is greater than the CIN value, the

printer sends X-ON and enters the ready state. If the free space

in the buffer is less than the CIN value, the printer enters the busy

state without any operation. In the busy or offline state, the

SRTS and DTR signals remain active. X-ON and X-OFF signals

are sent to the computer even if the DSR or CD input signal is

inactive. In the X-ON/X-OFF (I) protocol, the X-ON signal is

sent when the power is turned on. In the X-ON/X-OFF (II)

protocol, the X-ON signal is not sent when the power is turned

on.

The X-OFF signal is sent once in any of the following conditions:

(1) The ready state changes to the busy state.

(2) The ready state changes to the offline state.

(3) 64 bytes of data are received in the state shown in (1) or

(2) above, provided the free area in the buffer is greater

than 64 bytes.

(4) The free area in the buffer becomes zero, regardless of the

online or offline state.

The X-ON signal is sent once in any of the following conditions:

(1) The busy state changes into the ready state.

(2) The offline state changes into the online state.

(3) The printer enters the online state when power is turned

on, provided the X-ON/X-OFF (I) protocol is selected.

7-9

— 7. Interface specifications —

X-ON/X-OFF (I)/(II) protocol

(1) If the ONLINE key is pressed in the offline state and the

free area in the buffer is over the CIN value,

1) The printer sends X-ON and enters the online ready

state if it was in the ready state.

2) The printer sends no signal and enters the online busy

state if it was in the busy state.

(2) If the ONLINE key is pressed in the offline state and the

free area in the buffer is less than the CIN value, the printer

sends no signal and enters the online busy state.

(3) If the ready state is changed into the offline state by pressing

the ONLINE key and data is input and the free area in the

buffer exceeds the CIN value during data input even though

the printer has sent X-OFF once, the printer does not send

X-OFF.

However, if the printer receives the 64th byte of data after

entering the offline state, it sends X-OFF once.

(4) The printer sends X-OFF once if the printer enters the

offline state due to an out-of-paper error after initialization.

(5) In the X-ON/X-OFF (I) protocol, X-ON is output after

power on when initialization is completed and the printer

enters the online state.

●Serial interface

7-10 — 7. Interface specifications —

Special notes

READY

ON-LINE

BUSY

OFF-LINE

POWER ON

0 CIN CRN FULL

[OFF]

(OFF) (OFF)

(ON) (ON)

[ON]

<OFF>

<OFF>

{OFF}

(X) (X) (X)(X)

<ON>

<ON>

: X-ON or X-OFF is sent once when the data size

changes.

: X-ON or X-OFF is sent once when the ONLINE

key is pressed.

: X-OFF is sent when the 64th byte of data is

received after sending X-OFF.

: X-OFF is sent when the free area in the buffer

becomes zero.

: X-ON is sent when power is turned on and the

X-ON/X-OFF (I) protocol is in use.

: No signal is sent. Status transition due to change

in the amount of data.

: Status transition caused by pressing the ONLINE key.

[ON][OFF]

(ON), (OFF)

{OFF}

<OFF>

●Serial interface

Upon reception of ETX(03)H, the printer sends ACK(06)H to the

computer to indicate that it is ready. If the printer is busy, it does

not send ACK to indicate that it is busy.

If the free area in the buffer is less than the CIN value when the

printer receives ETX, the printer does not send ACK

immediately. It sends ACK when the free area in the buffer

becomes greater than the CRN value. If the printer is in the

offline state, the printer sends ACK when the ONLINE key is

pressed and the printer becomes ready.

In the busy or offline state, the SRTS and DTR signals remain

ON. The printer sends ACK to the computer even if the CTS

input signal is OFF.

The interface does not analyze the (03)H code. Thus, the printer

sends ACK in response to (03)H received in an escape sequence

or graphic data sequence. The received (03)H code is sent to the

emulation as normal data.

The baud rate can be selected from the values shown below in the

extended setup mode:

38400BPS, 19200BPS, 9600BPS, 4800BPS,

24

00BPS,

12

00BPS,

6

00BPS,

3

00BPS,

The data frame has the following organization.

START BIT (1) + DATA BIT

(7 or 8)

+ PARITY BIT

(0 or 1)

+ STOP

BIT (1 or 2) MARK: Logic "1" (-3 to -15 V)

SPACE: Logic "0" (+3 to +15 V)

7-11

— 7. Interface specifications —

ETX/ACK protocol

Baud rate

Serial data organization

Automatic serial/parallel selection

+3 +15V

-3 -15V START D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 STOP

See page 3-49.

If #70 INTERFACE is set to AUTO in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE, the serial or parallel

interface is selected automatically.

In the initial condition, both the serial and parallel interfaces are ready. When data is input

through either interface, printing is done through that interface. In printing, the other interface is

in the busy state. If data is input through the busy interface, the data is ignored.

If no data is input to the first interface, both interfaces are reset to the initial ready state.

8-1

— 8. Software commands —

BEL (07)D (07)H

Activates the printer buzzer.

BS (08)D (08)H

Moves the printing position leftward by one character.

HT (09)D (09)H

Moves the printing position to the next horizontal tab.

LF (10)D (0A)H

Single line feed

Causes a carriage return if #28

LF SETTING is set to CR + LF

in

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

VT (11)D (0B)H

Vertical tab

Causes a carriage return if #28 LF SETTING is set to CR + LF in

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

FF (12)D (0C)H

Form feed

Causes a carriage return, regardless of the setting in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

CR (13)D (0D)H

Carriage return

Executes a line feed after a carriage return if #27 CR SETTING

is set to CR + LF or #27 CR SETTING is set to AUTOFEED and

the parallel AUTO FEED signal is low.

SO (14)D (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line.

SI (15)D (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode (from 10 cpi to 17 cpi, 12 cpi to 20 cpi, or

proportional to condensed proportional). Valid only when #34

PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

DC1 (17)D (11)H

Printer select

Cancels the input data ignoring condition which is set by the DC3

(deselect) code. Valid when #71 SELECT IN ENABLE is set to 1

in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE or SELECT IN ENABLE is

selected to I/F and the SELECT IN signal is high.

DC2 (18)D (12)H

Cancels condensed mode.

DC3 (19)D (13)H

Printer deselect

Puts the printer into the deselect state. Valid when #71 SELECT

IN ENABLE is set to 1 in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE or

SELECT IN ENABLE is selected to I/F and the SELECT IN

signal is high.

DC4 (20)D (14)H

Cancels the double-width mode established by the SO command.

CAN (24)D (18)H

Cancel

Clears all data in the print buffer and printing position specified

with the horizontal position move command (HT, ESC $, ESC \,

etc.).

DEL (127)D (7F)H

Deletes a character.

ESC (27)D (1B)H

Designates ESC sequence.

ESC SO (27)D(14)D (1B)H (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line.

ESC SI (27)D(15)D (1B)H (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode.

ESC EM (27)D(25)D (1B)H (19)H

Specifies the paper path.

nn n

n="R" : Ejects paper.

n="B" : Feeds paper with the rear tractor.

n="F" : Feeds paper with the front tractor.

n="M" : Feeds manually loaded paper.

n="f" : Ejects paper to the front.

n="t" : Ejects paper to the top.

n="r" : Ejects paper to the rear.

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

EPSON Software commands

8. Software commands

ESC SP (27)D(32)D (1B)H (20)H

Specifies the space between characters.

(0 ≤n ≤127)

nn n

The dot density differs with the printing mode, as shown below.

ESC ! (27)D(33)D (1B)H (21)H

Batch selection of the printing mode

(0 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC # (27)D(35)D (1B)H (23)H

Cancels MSB control.

ESC $ (27)D(36)D (1B)H (24)H

Specifies the absolute printing position.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Distance =

n1 + ( n2

×

256 )

(In units of 1/60 inch)

ESC % (27)D(37)D (1B)H (25)H

Specifies or cancels the down-load character set.

(n = 00, 01, 30, 31)

nn n n = 01, 31:

Specifies the down-load character set.

n = 00, 30:

Cancels the down-load character set.

ESC & (27)D(38)D (1B)H (26)H

Defines the down-load characters.

s, n, m, s, n, m, s, n, m, s:

Down-load character set number

[ a0, a1, [ a0, a1, [ a0, a1, n :

Define start of ASCII code

(00)H ~ (7F)H

a2, data] a2, data] a2, data] m :

Define end of ASCII code

(00)H ~ (7F)H

m-n+1 m-n+1 m-n+1 a0 :

Left space

a1 :

Actual character width (Number of dots)

a2 :

Right space

ESC * (27)D(42)D (1B)H (2A)H

Selects graphic function.

mm m

8-pin graphic:

n1 +(n2

×

256)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

24-pin graphic:

(n1 +(n2

×

256))

×

3

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

•••dk ••• dk ••• dk

In the 8-pin graphic mode, one bit of data corresponds to two print head pin dots, as shown below.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-2 — 8. Software commands —

Printing mode Dot pitch

Draft 1/120 inch

LQ 1/180 inch

Proportional 1/180 inch

Bit "1" "0" Command having

same function

0 12 cpi 10 cpi ESC M / ESC P

1 Proportional Proportional canceled ESC p

2 Condensed Condensed canceled SI / DC2

3 Emphasized Emphasized canceled ESC E / ESC F

4 Double strike Double strike canceled ESC G / ESC H

5 Double-width Double-width canceled ESC W

6 Italic Italic canceled ESC 4 / ESC 5

7 Underscoring selected Underscoring canceled ESC -

Mode Pin m Horizontal dot density Max. dots per line

(dot/inch)

Single-density 8 0 60 816

Double-density 8 1 120 1632

Double-speed 8 2 120 1632

double-density❈

Quadruple-density ❈8 3 240 3264

CRT I 8 4 80 1080

CRT II 8 6 90 1224

Single-density 24 32 60 816

Double-density 24 33 120 1632

CRT III 24 38 90 1224

Triple-density 24 39 180 2488

Hex-density❈24 40 360 4896

❈Horizontally adjacent dots can not be printed.

Data MSB ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●LSB

↓↓↓↓↓↓↓↓

Print head pin Top ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●●Bottom

ESC ( - (27,40,45)D (1B,28,2D)H

Specifies line type.

( n1 = 3 ) ( n2 = 0 ) ( m = 1 )

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 d1 = 1

Underscore

d2 = 1

Single line

m m m d1 = 2

Center line

d2 = 2

Double lines

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 = 3

Upper line

d2 = 5

Single dotted line

d2 = 6

Double dotted lines

d2 = 0

Cancels the line specification.

ESC ( ^ (27,40,94)D (1B,28,5E)H

All-character set.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Prints

n1 + n2 x 256 c

haracters in the all-character character set.

ESC ( t (27,40,116)D (1B,28,74)H

Specifies a character set.

n1n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 d1 :

Displays

ESC t n

command table No.

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2 d2, d3 :

Specifies the character set.

d3 d3 d3 d2 = 0, d3=0 : ITALIC

d2 = 1, d3=0 : PC-437

d2 = 3, d3=0 : PC-850

d2 = 7, d3=0 : PC-860

d2 = 8, d3=0 : PC-863

d2 = 9, d3=0 : PC-865

d2 = 11, d3=0 : PC-857

d2 = 44, d3=0 : PC-858

d2 = 24, d3=0 : PC-861

d2 = 25, d3=0 : PC-BRASCII

d2 = 26, d3=0 : PC-ABICOMP

d2 = 17, d3=0 : ISO-8859-1

ESC + (27)D(43)D (1B)H (2B)H

Specifies a line feed pitch of n/360 inch.

(0 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC - (27)D(45)D (1B)H (2D)H

Specifies or cancels underscoring.

n n n n = 01, 31:

Specifies underscoring.

n = 00, 30

: Cancels underscoring.

ESC / (27)D(47)D (1B)H (2F)H

Selects the vertical tab channel.

(0 ≤n ≤7)

mm m

ESC 0 (27)D(48)D (1B)H (30)H

Specifies 1/8 inch line feed pitch.

ESC 2 (27)D(50)D (1B)H (32)H

Specifies 1/6 inch line feed pitch.

ESC 3 (27)D(51)D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies line feed pitch of n/180 inch.

(0 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC 4 (27)D(52)D (1B)H (34)H

Specifies the italic font.

ESC 5 (27)D(53)D (1B)H (35)H

Cancels the italic font.

ESC 6 (27)D(54)D (1B)H (36)H

Expands the character code area.

Makes the area from (80)H to (9F)H the character code area,

rather than the control code area, when the graphic character

table or down-load character table is selected. This is the initial

condition.

ESC 7 (27)D(55)D (1B)H (37)H

Cancels the expanded character code area.

ESC : (27)D(58)D (1B)H (3A)H

Copies the internal character set.

(0 ≤n ≤255)

NUL NUL NUL

Draft mode:

n = 0

n s n s n s

LQ mode:

n = 0 ~ 9

s :

Down-load character set number (See

ESC &)

ESC < (27)D(60)D (1B)H (3C)H

Returns to the home position.

Move the print head to the left end without sensing the home

position.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-3

— 8. Software commands —

ESC = (27)D(61)D (1B)H (3D)H

Specifies

MSB 0

ESC > (27)D(62)D (1B)H (3E)H

Specifies

MSB 1

ESC ? (27)D(63)D (1B)H (3F)H

Converts the graphic modes.

n m n m

n m (n= "K","L","Y","Z", m = 0 ≤m ≤40)

Converts the

ESC K, ESC L, ESC Y or ESC Z

graphic mode

into the ESC * graphic mode.

n:

Graphic mode to be converted

m:

New graphic mode

The initial setting is as shown below;

ESC K = ESC

✽

00

ESC L = ESC

✽

01

ESC Y = ESC

✽

02

ESC Z = ESC

✽

03

ESC @ (27)D(64)D (1B)H (40)H

Initializes the printer.

Resets the print modes and clears command settings, data in the

print buffer and printing position.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-4 — 8. Software commands —

m Graphic mode Horizontal dot density

dpi (dot/inch)

0 Single-density 60 (8PIN)

1 Double-density 120 (8PIN)

2Double-speed double-density 120 (8PIN)

3 Quadruple-density 240 (8PIN)

4 CRT I 80 (8PIN)

6 CRT II 90 (8PIN)

32 Single-density 60 (24PIN)

33 Double-density 120 (24PIN)

38 CRT III 90 (24PIN)

39 Triple-density 180 (24PIN)

40 Hex-density 360 (24PIN)

Initialization item Status

•Line feed pitch Specified in setup mode

•Page length Specified in setup mode

•TOF Regarding current line as TOF

•Bottom margin Specified in setup mode

•Vertical tab Setting when power is turned on

•Vertical tab channel Channel 0

•Right & left margins Specified in setup mode

•Horizontal tab Specified in setup mode

•Inter-character pitch 0

•Character pitch Specified in setup mode

•Special effect Canceled

•Down-load character Not cleared

•Character set Specified in setup mode

•Single-direction printing Specified in setup mode

•MSB control Canceled

•According to ESC ?

Graphic mode conversion Canceled

•Justification Canceled

•International character Specified in setup mode

•Character font Specified in setup mode

•Print buffer Cleared

•Communication buffer Not cleared

•Printing position Left margin position

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in n/60 inch.

(0 ≤n ≤127)

nn n

ESC B (27)D(66)D (1B)H (42)H

Specifies the vertical tab position.

(1 ≤nk ≤255, 1 ≤k ≤16)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

This command can specify a maximum of 16 vertical tab

••• nk ••• nk ••• nk

positions.

NUL NUL NUL

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in number of lines.

(1 ≤n ≤127)

nn n

Valid when #32 PAGE LENGTH LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in inches.

(1 ≤n ≤22)

NUL n NUL n NUL n

Valid when #32 PAGE LENGTH LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC D (27)D(68)D (1B)H (44)H

Specifies the horizontal tab position.

(1 ≤nk ≤255, 1 ≤k ≤32)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

This command can specify a maximum of 32 horizontal tab

••• nk ••• nk ••• nk

positions.

NUL NUL NUL

ESC E (27)D(69)D (1B)H (45)H

Specifies emphasized printing.

ESC F (27)D(70)D (1B)H (46)H

Cancels emphasized printing.

ESC G (27)D(71)D (1B)H (47)H

Specifies the double striking.

ESC H (27)D(72)D (1B)H (48)H

Cancels the double striking.

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/180 inch.

(0 ≤n ≤255)

ESC K (27)D(75)D (1B)H (4B)H

Specifies the 8-dot single-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k= n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 60 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 816 dot

ESC L (27)D(76)D (1B)H (4C)H

Specifies the 8-dot double-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 120 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 1632 dot

ESC M (27)D(77)D (1B)H (4D)H

Specifies 12 cpi (elite).

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC N (27)D(78)D (1B)H (4E)H

Specifies the bottom margin.

(1 ≤n ≤127)

nn n

This command is ignored in the CSF mode.

ESC O (27)D(79)D (1B)H (4F)H

Cancels the bottom margin.

This command is ignored in the CSF mode.

ESC P (27)D(80)D (1B)H (50)H

Specifies 10 cpi.

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

ESC Q (27)D(81)D (1B)H (51)H

Specifies the right margin.

nn n

The right margin cannot exceed the paper width specified with

#4 or #5 in the SETUP MODE.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-5

— 8. Software commands —

ESC R (27)D(82)D (1B)H (52)H

Selects a national character type.

(0 ≤n ≤13, 31, 64)

nn n

ESC S (27)D(83)D (1B)H (53)H

Specifies superscript or subscript.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Specifies superscript.

n = 01, 31

: Specifies subscript.

Characters corresponding to the graphic character sets

(B0)H to

(DF)H, (F4)H and (F5)H

are invalid.

ESC T (27)D(84)D (1B)H (54)H

Cancels superscript or subscript.

ESC U (27)D(85)D (1B)H (55)H

Specifies or cancels uni-directional printing.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Cancels uni-directional printing.

n = 01, 31

: Specifies uni-directional printing.

ESC W (27)D(87)D (1B)H (57)H

Specifies or cancels double-width printing.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Cancels double-width printing.

n = 01, 31

: Specifies double-width printing.

ESC Y (27)D(89)D (1B)H (59)H Specifies the

8-dot, double-speed, double-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 120 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line:

1632 dot

Horizontally adjacent dots cannot be printed.

ESC Z (27)D(90)D (1B)H (5A)H Specifies the

8-dot, quadruple-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k= n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 240 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 3264 dot

Horizontally adjacent dots cannot be printed.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-6 — 8. Software commands —

nNATION 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

0 U.S.A.

1 FRANCE

2 GERMANY

3 U.K.

4 DENMARK

5 SWEDEM

6 ITALY

7 SPAIN

8 JAPAN

9 NORWAY

10 DENMARK II

11 SPAIN II

12 LATIN AMERICA

13 KOREA

31 TURKEY

64 LEGAL

ESC \ (27)D(92)D (1B)H (5C)H

Specifies the relative printing position.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Specifies where to start printing of the next data in relation to

the current position as shown below.

If (n1+n2×256) is less than 32768 [8000H], the printing position

moves to the right of the current position by (n1+n2×256).

If (n1+n2×256) is equal to or more than 32768 [8000H], the

printing position moves to the left of the current position by

65536 – (n1+n2 ×256).

Printing mode Unit of motion

Draft

1/ 120 inch

LQ or proportional

1/ 180 inch

ESC a (27)D(97)D (1B)H (61)H

Selects the printing position adjustment.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Left justification

n = 01, 31

: Centering

n = 02, 32

: Right justification

n = 03, 33

: Justification

Left justification is selected by default.

ESC b (27)D(98)D (1B)H (62)H

Specifies the vertical tab position in each channel.

m m m (0 ≤m ≤7, 1 ≤nk ≤255, 1 ≤k ≤16)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

This command specifies the vertical tab position in channel m.

••• nk ••• nk ••• nk

A maximum of 16 vertical tab positions can be specified.

NUL NUL NUL

m: Channel number

If mis equal to or more than 8, three bytes of ESC b m are

ignored.

ESC g (27)D(103)D (1B)H (67)H

Selects

15CPI.

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO.

ESC j (27)D(106)D (1B)H (6A)H

Executes reverse feeding at a pitch of

n/180

inch

. (0 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC k (27)D(107)D (1B)H (6B)H

Selects the font.

nn n n

Font

(00)H ROMAN

(01)H SANS SERIF

(02)H COURIER

(03)H PRESTIGE ELITE

(04)H SCRIPT

(05)H OCR-B

(06)H OCR-A

(07)H ORATOR

(08)H ORATOR-S

(14)H GOTHIC

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-7

— 8. Software commands —

ESC l (27)D(108)D (1B)H (6C)H

Specifies the left margin.

nn n

This command sets the left margin at the “n”th character by the

character width when the command is executed (including

double- width and inter-character SP).

ESC p (27)D(112)D (1B)H (70)H

Specifies or cancels proportional printing.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Cancels proportional printing.

n = 01, 31

: Specifies proportional printing.

The draft and LQ modes have no difference for the proportional

printing. This command is valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set

to NO.

ESC q (27)D(113)D (1B)H (71)H

Selects a special effect.

nn n

n =

00: Normal character

n =

01: Outline character

n = 02

: Shadow character

n = 03

: Outline with shadow character

Normal characters are selected by default.

Any characters corresponding to the graphic character sets

(B0)H to (DF)H and (F4)H to (F5)H.

ESC t (27)D(116)D (1B)H (74)H

Selects a character code table.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Selects the italic character table.

n = 01, 31

: Selects the graphic character table.

n = 02, 32

: Selects the downloaded character table.

n = 03, 33

: Selects the graphic character table.

If downloaded characters cannot be printed when the

downloaded character table is selected, italic characters are

printed. The selected character table is changed with the

ETS ( t

command.

ESC w 27)D(119)D (1B)H (77)H

Specifies or cancels double-height printing.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Cancels double-height printing.

n = 01, 31

: Specifies double-height printing.

Double-height printing does not apply to the graphic data.

ESC x (27)D(120)D (1B)H (78)H

Selects character.

n n n n = 00, 30

: Selects draft characters.

n = 01, 31

: Selects LQ characters.

●

EPSON Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-8 — 8. Software commands —

— 8. Software commands —

●

IBM Software commands

BEL (07)D (07)H

Activates the printer buzzer.

BS (08)D (08)H

Moves the printing position to the left by one character.

HT (09)D (09)H

Moves the printing position to the following horizontal tab.

LF (10)D (0A)H

Single-line feed

Causes carriage return if #28 LF SETTING is set to CR + LF in

the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

VT (11)D (0B)H

Vertical tab

Moves the printing position to the left margin if #28 LF

SETTING is set to CR + LF in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

FF (12)D (0C)H

Form feed (Always moves the printing position to the left margin.)

CR (13)D (0D)H

Carriage return

Executes line feeding after carriage return if #27 CR SETTING

is set to CR + LF.

SO (14)D (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line.

SI (15)D (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode.

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

DC1 (17)D (11)H

Printer select

Changes the deselect condition established with

ESC Q (23)H or

(B9)H

to the select condition.

Valid when #71 SELECT IN ENABLE is set to 1 in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE or SELECT IN ENABLE is set to

I/F and the SELECT IN signal is high.

DC2 (18)D (12)H

Cancels the condensed mode.

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

DC4 (20)D (14)H

Cancels the double-width mode established by the SO command.

CAN (24)D (18)H

Cancel

Clears all data in the print buffer and moves the printing

position to the beginning of the next line.

ESC (27)D (1B)H

Designates ESC sequence.

ESC EM (27)D(25)D (1B)H (19)H

Specifies the paper path.

nn n

n="R" : Ejects paper.

n="B" : Feeds paper with the rear tractor.

n="F" : Feeds paper with the front tractor.

n="M" : Feeds manually loaded paper.

n="f" : Ejects paper to the front.

n="t" : Ejects paper to the top.

n="r" : Ejects paper to the rear.

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-9

IBM Software commands

— 8. Software commands —

ESC

✽

(27)D (42 )D (1B)H (2A)H

Selects a graphic function.

m m m

Valid only when

#26 AGM (Alternate Graphics Mode)

is set to

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 YES

in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

m(

printing density

)= 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 32, 33, 38,

39, 40

... dk ... dk ... dk

ESC – (27)D (45 )D (1B)H (2D)H

Specifies or cancels underscoring.

(n = 0, 1)

nn n

ESC 0 (27)D (48 )D (1B)H (30)H

Specifies line feed at a 1/8-inch pitch.

ESC 1 (27)D (49 )D (1B)H (31)H

Specifies line feed at a 7/72-inch pitch.

ESC 2 (27)D (50 )D (1B)H (32)H

Executes

ESC A.

Sets the line feed pitch to the value specified by

ESC A.

ESC 3 (27)D (51 )D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies

n/216

-inch line feed pitch

. {1 ≤n ≤255}

nn n When n=0, this command is invalid.

ESC 3 (27)D (51 )D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies n/180 -inch line feed pitch.

(AGM) {1 ≤n ≤255}

nn n

Setting of n = 0 is possible.

ESC 4 (27)D(52)D (1B)H (34)H TOF

Specifies.

ESC 5 (27)D(53)D (1B)H (35)H

Specifies or cancels automatic line feeding.

{n = 0, 1}

nn n

Specifies whether to execute a carriage return and a line feed

or a carriage return only when executing the CR code.

n=0

: Carriage return only

n=1

: Carriage return and line feeding

ESC 6 (27)D(54)D (1B)H (36)H

Specifies character set 2.

ESC 7 (27)D(55)D (1B)H (37)H

Specifies character set 1.

ESC : (27)D(58)D (1B)H (3A)H

Specifies

12 CPI.

Valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO in the EXTENDED

SETUP MODE.

ESC = (27)D(61)D (1B)H (3D)H

Specifies downloading.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 {0 ≤n1 ≤255} {0 ≤n2 ≤255} {I.D.byte = (23)H}

(I.D.byte) (I.D.byte) (I.D.byte) {(00)H ≤(adrs-low) ≤(FF)H} {(00)H ≤(adrs-high) ≤(FF)H}

(adrs-low) (adrs-low) (adrs-low) {(00)H ≤data ≤(FF)H}

(adrs-high) (adrs-high) (adrs-high)

The number of following data:

n1+n2

×

256.

data data data

When

n1=n2=0

, the downloading area is initialized. Two bytes,

(adrs-low)(adrs-high)

show the memory address in which the first

byte of data is stored. The next data is stored in the following

address in sequence.

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of

n/72 inch. {1 ≤n ≤255}

nn n

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/72 inch. When n = 0,

this command is invalid.

●

IBM Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-10

Mode Pin m Horizontal dot density Max. dots per line

dpi (dot/inch)

Single-density 8 0 60 Same as ESC K

Double-density 8 1 120 Same as ESC L

Double-speed 8 2 120 Same as ESC Y

double-density❈

Quadruple-density ❈8 3 240 Same as ESC Z

CRT I 8 4 80 CRT I

CRT II 8 6 90 CRT II

Single-density 24 32 60 High density of ESC K

Double-density 24 33 120 High density of ESC L

CRT III 24 38 90 CRT III

Triple-density 24 39 180 Triple high density

Hex-density❈24 40 360 Quadruple high density

❈Horizontally adjacent dots can not be printed.

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/60 inch

{1 ≤n ≤255} (AGM)

nn n

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/60 inch.

When n = 0 , this command is invalid.

ESC B (27)D(66)D (1B)H (42)H

Specifies the vertical tabs.

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

A maximum of 64 tabs can be specified.

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Specify vertical tabs from the lowest tab and end with (00)H.

NUL (00)D (00)H

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in number of lines.

{1 ≤n ≤255}

nn n

The maximum page length is 182 inches.

Valid when #32 PAGE LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in inches.

{1 ≤n ≤182}

NUL n

(00)D

n

(00)H

n

Valid when #32 PAGE LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC D (27)D (68 )D (1B)H (44)H

Specifies the horizontal tabs.

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

A maximum of 28 tabs can be specified.

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Specify horizontal tabs from the lowest tab and end with (00)H.

NUL (00)D (00)H

ESC E (27)D(69)D (1B)H (45)H

Specifies emphasized printing.

ESC F (27)D(70)D (1B)H (46)H

Cancels emphasized printing.

ESC G (27)D(71)D (1B)H (47)H

Specifies double-striking.

ESC H (27)D(72)D (1B)H (48)H

Cancels double-striking.

ESC I (27)D(73)D (1B)H (49)H

Selects a font.

n = 0, 2, 3, 4, 6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22

nn n

If the value “n” is not as specified above, this command is invalid.

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/216 inches.

(1 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/180 inches.

(AGM) (1 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

ESC K (27)D(75)D (1B)H (4B)H Specifies the 8-dot single- density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2 Horizontal dot density : 60dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line:

816 dot

ESC L (27)D(76)D (1B)H (4C)H Specifies the 8-dot double-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2 x 256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density : 120dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 1632 dot

— 8. Software commands —

●

IBM Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-11

nInternal/download Character quality Character width

0 Internal font Draft 10 CPI

2 Internal font LQ 10 CPI

3 Internal font LQ Proportional

4 Download Draft 10 CPI

6 Download LQ 10 CPI

7 Download LQ Proportional

8 Internal font Draft 12 CPI

10 Internal font LQ 12 CPI

12 Download Draft 12 CPI

14 Download LQ 12 CPI

16 Internal font Draft Condensed

18 Internal font LQ Condensed

20 Download Draft Condensed

22 Download LQ Condensed

— 8. Software commands —

ESC N (27)D(78)D (1B)H (4E)H

Specifies the bottom margin.

(1 ≤n ≤255)

nn n

The number of lines to be skipped is specified by “n” and the

bottom margin is specified in the preset line feed amount.

ESC O (27)D(79)D (1B)H (4F)H

Cancels the bottom margin.

ESC P (27)D(80)D (1B)H (50)H

Specifies or cancels proportional printing.

n n n n = 0

: Cancels proportional printing.

n = 1

: Specifies proportional printing.

This command is valid when #34 PITCH LOCK is set to NO.

ESC Q (27)D(81)D (1B)H (51)H

Printer deselect

nn n

Brings the printer into the deselect state when

n=(23)H,(B9)H.

Valid when #71 SELECT IN ENABLE is set to 1 in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE or set to I/F and the SELECT IN

signal is high.

ESC R (27)D(82)D (1B)H (52)H

Initializes the horizontal and vertical tab positions.

Clears the vertical tab position.

ESC S (27)D(83)D (1B)H (53)H

Specifies superscript or subscript.

n n n n = 0

: Specifies superscript.

n = 1

: Specifies subscript.

ESC T (27)D(84)D (1B)H (54)H

Cancels superscript or subscript.

ESC U (27)D(85)D (1B)H (55)H

Specifies or cancels uni-directional printing.

n n n n = 0

: Cancels uni-directional printing.

n = 1

: Specifies uni-directional printing.

ESC W (27)D(87)D (1B)H (57)H

Specifies or cancels double-width printing.

n n n n = 0

: Cancels double-width printing.

n = 1

: Specifies double-width printing.

ESC X (27)D(88)D (1B)H (58)H

Specifies the right and left margins.

{0 ≤n ≤255} {0 ≤m ≤255}

n m n m n m

ESC Y (27)D(89)D (1B)H (59)H

Specifies the 8-dot double-speed double-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2

×

256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 120 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 1632 dot

Horizontally adjacent dots cannot be printed.

ESC Z (27)D(90)D (1B)H (5A)H

Specifies the quadruple-density graphic mode.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2

×

256

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

Horizontal dot density

: 240 dpi

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

Maximum dots per line

: 3264 dot

Horizontally adjacent dots cannot be printed.

ESC [ - (27,91,45)D (1B, 5B, 2D)H

Specifies the line type.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Number of data

k = n1 + n2

×

256

m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 = 1 :

Underscore

m2 = 0

: Cancels the line specification.

m1 = 2

: Center line

m2 = 1

: Single line

m1 = 3

: Upper line

m2 = 2

: Double lines

m2 = 255

: Cancels the line specification.

●

IBM Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-12

— 8. Software commands —

●

IBM Software commands

ESC [ @ (27,91,64)D (1B, 5B, 40)H

Specifies or cancels double-width, double-height printing.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1+n2

×

256

indicates the number of following data.

Normally,

n1=4 and n2=0.

m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2 {n1 = 4} {n2 = 0} {m1 = 00, 01, 02, 04, 08, 10, 20 H}

m3 m4 m3 m4 m3 m4 {m3 = 00, 01, 02, 10, 11, 12, 20, 21, 22 H}

{m4 = (00)H, (01)H, (02)H)} {m2 = 0}

This command specifies or cancels double-height, double-width

printing.

m1 = 1

: Specifies italic characters.

m1 = 2

: Cancels italic characters.

m1 = 4

: Specifies the outline characters.

m1 = 8

: Cancels the outline characters.

m1 = 16

: Specifies shadow characters.

m1 = 32

: Cancels shadow characters.

m2 :

Meaningless

m3 : High order half-byte (4 bit)

indicates

Line Feed.

Low order half-byte (4 bit)

indicates

High.

m4 : Low order half-byte (4 bit)

indicates

Width.

Line Feed indicates the mode where the line feed pitch is

doubled. High indicates the mode where the height is doubled.

Width indicates the mode where the width is doubled.

Setting is;

0

: Not changed

1

: Standard size

2

: Double size

3

or more: Same as 0.

Graphic symbols are printed in the standard size.

ESC [ K (27,91,75)D (1B, 5B, 4B)H

Software initial

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1+n2

×

256

indicates the number of the next data.

m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2

When

m1 =00, 04, FE H

, initialization is executed without clearing

m3 m4 m3 m4 m3 m4 downloading.

m1 =01, 05, FF H

,initialization is executed with clearing

download area.

m2 = 03, 16, 23, 24, B1, B4 H

,the next two bytes of data are valid.

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-13

m 3 m 4

bit 7 0 : m 3 is valid. 0 : m 4 is valid.

1 : m 3 is invalid. 1 : m 4 is invalid.

bit 6 ————— Code page

0 : 437

1 : 850

bit 5 ————— —————

bit 4 LF code —————

0 : LF only

1 : LF + CR

bit 3 CR code —————

0 : C R only

1 : CR + LF

bit 2 Page length —————

0 : 11 inches

1 : 12 inches

bit 1 Zero font Printing range

0 : No slash 0 : 13.6 inches

1 : With slash 1 : 8 inches

bit 0 Character set —————

0 : Set 1

1 : Set 2

— 8. Software commands —

ESC [ I (27,91,73)D (1B, 5B,49)H

Selects the font.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 + n2 x 256

indicates the number of the next data.

Hf Lf Hf Lf Hf Lf Hf, Lf = FONT ID

Hs Ls Hs Ls Hs Ls Hs, Ls =

Size (pitch & height)

Sm 00 Sm 00 Sm 00 Sm = 1

: Font size is specified with Hs, Ls.

Hc Lc Hc Lc Hc Lc Sm = 2 or 3

: Specifies proportional printing.

Hs, Ls, Sm is valid only when the font ID specified with Hf, Lf

is invalid or ignored.

Hc, Lc specifies the code page.

The following table shows the relationship between the Hf, Lf

values and fonts.

●

IBM Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-14

Hf Lf

(00)H (0B)H COURIER 10CPI

(01)H (EB)H COURIER 12CPI

(01)H (EC)H COURIER 15CPI

(01)H (ED)H COURIER 17CPI

(01)H (EE)H COURIER 20CPI

(01)H (1E)H COURIER 24CPI

(00)H (AB)H COURIER PROP

(00)H (0C)H PRESTIGE 10CPI

(01)H (EF)H PRESTIGE 12CPI

(01)H (F0)H PRESTIGE 15CPI

(01)H (C9)H PRESTIGE 17CPI

(01)H (CA)H PRESTIGE 20CPI

(01)H (1F)H PRESTIGE 24CPI

(00)H (A4)H PRESTIGE PROP

(00)H (24)H GOTHIC 10CPI

(01)H (8F)H GOTHIC 12CPI

(01)H (8E)H GOTHIC 15CPI

(01)H (8D)H GOTHIC 17CPI

(01)H (8C)H GOTHIC 20CPI

(01)H (20)H GOTHIC 24CPI

(00)H (AE)H GOTHIC PROP

(00)H (19)H ORATORs 10CPI

(01)H (D0)H ORATORs 12CPI

(01)H (D1)H ORATORs 15CPI

(01)H (D2)H ORATORs 17CPI

(01)H (D3)H ORATORs 20CPI

(01)H (23)H ORATORs 24CPI

(00)H (C7)H ORATORs PROP

(00)H (05)H ORATOR 10CPI

(01)H (CB)H ORATOR 12CPI

(01)H(CC)H ORATOR 15CPI

(01)H(CD)H ORATOR 17CPI

(01)H (CE)H ORATOR 20CPI

(01)H (21)H ORATOR 24CPI

(00)H (C6)H ORATOR PROP

Hf Lf

(01)H (D4)H SCRIPT 10CPI

(01)H (D5)H SCRIPT 12CPI

(01)H (D6)H SCRIPT 15CPI

(01)H (D7)H SCRIPT 17CPI

(01)H (D8)H SCRIPT 20CPI

(01)H (24)H SCRIPT 24CPI

(00)H (C8)H SCRIPT PROP

Hf Lf

(00)H (12)H COURIER 10CPI Italic

(00)H(2E)H COURIER 10CPI Emphasized

(00)H (39)H COURIER 10CPI Emphasized italic

(00)H (55)H COURIER 12CPI

(00)H(5C)H COURIER 12CPI Italic

(00)H(6C)H COURIER 12CPI Emphasized

(00)H (74)H COURIER 12CPI Emphasized italic

(00)H(AC)H COURIER PROP Italic

(00)H(B8)H COURIER PROP Emphasized

(00)H(B9)H COURIER PROP Emphasized italic

(00)H(D6)H COURIER 15CPI Emphasized

(00)H(D7)H COURIER 15CPI Italic

(00)H(D8)H COURIER 15CPI Emphasized italic

(00)H(DF)H COURIER 15CPI

(00)H (F6)H COURIER 10CPI Double-width, double-height

(00)H (F4)H COURIER 10CPI Double-width, double-height

(00)H (F5)H COURIER 10CPI Emphasized double-width, double-height

(00)H(FD)H COURIER 17.1CPI Emphasized

(00)H(FE)H COURIER 17.1CPI

(00)H(3C)H PRESTIGE 10CPI Emphasized

(00)H (56)H PRESTIGE 12CPI

(00)H (6F)H PRESTIGE 12CPI Emphasized

(00)H (70)H PRESTIGE 12CPI Italic

(00)H(DD)H PRESTIGE 15CPI

(01)H (00)H PRESTIGE 17.1CPI

— 8. Software commands —

●

IBM Software commands

Function

8-15

Hf Lf

(00)H (57)H GOTHIC 12CPI

(00)H (6D)H GOTHIC 12CPI Italic

(00)H (6E)H GOTHIC 12CPI Emphasized

(00)H (9D)H GOTHIC PROP Emphasized

(00)H (A2)H GOTHIC PROP Italic

(00)H (DE)H GOTHIC 15CPI

(00)H (F1)H GOTHIC 10CPI Double-width,

double-height

(00)H (F2)H GOTHIC 10CPI Emphasized

Double-width,

double-height

(00)H (F3)H GOTHIC 10CPI Emphasized

Double-striking

Double-width,

double-height

(00)H (FF)H GOTHIC 17.1CPI

(01)H (19)H GOTHIC 20CPI

(32)H (00)H ROMAN 10CPI

(32)H (01)H ROMAN 12CPI

(32)H (02)H ROMAN 15CPI

(32)H (03)H ROMAN 17CPI

(32)H (04)H ROMAN 20CPI

(32)H (05)H ROMAN 24CPI

(32)H (06)H ROMAN PROP

(32)H (10)H SANS SERIF 10CPI

(32)H (11)H SANS SERIF 12CPI

(32)H (12)H SANS SERIF 15CPI

(32)H (13)H SANS SERIF 17CPI

(32)H (14)H SANS SERIF 20CPI

(32)H (15)H SANS SERIF 24CPI

(32)H (16)H SANS SERIF PROP

(32)H (20)H OCR-A 10CPI

(32)H (21)H OCR-A 12CPI

(32)H (23)H OCR-A 17CPI

(32)H (24)H OCR-A 20CPI

(32)H (30)H OCR-B 10CPI

(32)H (31)H OCR-B 12CPI

(32)H (33)H OCR-B 17CPI

(32)H (34)H OCR-B 20CPI

The following shows the relationship between the

Hs, Ls values and sizes.

Hs,Ls

00,00-00,41 24CPI Subscript

00,42-00,4D 20CPI Subscript

00,4E-00,59 17CPI Normal

00,5A-00,6B 15CPI Normal

00,6C-00,83 12CPI Normal

00,84-00,9B 10CPI Normal

00,9C-00,B3 17CPI Double-width

00,B4-00,D7 15CPI Double-width

00,D8-00,FE 12CPI Double-width

Double-hight

00,FF-FF,FF 10CPI Double-width

Double-hight

The following shows the relationship between the

Hc, Lc values and the code page.

Hc Lc Dec(Hc,Lc) CODE PAGE

(01)H (B5)H 437 CODE PAGE 437

(03)H (52)H 850 CODE PAGE 850

(03)H (5C)H 860 CODE PAGE 860

(03)H (5F)H 863 CODE PAGE 863

(03)H (61)H 865 CODE PAGE 865

(03)H (59)H 857 CODE PAGE 857

(03)H (5A)H 858 CODE PAGE 858

(40)H (00)H 16384 ISO-8859-1

(03)H (5d)H 861 CODE PAGE 861

(0F)H (07)H 3847 CODE PAGE BRASCII

(0F)H (08)H 3848

CODE PAGE ABICOMP

— 8. Software commands —

ESC [ T (27,91,84)D (1B, 5B, 54)H

Selects the code page.

(n1=4 n2=0 n3=0 n4=0)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 + n2 x 256

indicates the number of the next data.

n3 n4 n3 n4 n3 n4 n5=(01)H n6=(B5)H 437

n5 n6 n5 n6 n5 n6 (03)H (52)H 850

(03)H (59)H 857

(03)H (5A)H 858

(03)H (5C)H 860

(03)H (5F)H 863

(03)H (61)H 865

(40)H (00)H ISO-8859-1

(03)H (5D)H 861

(0F)H (07)H BRASCII

(0F)H (08)H ABICOMP

ESC [ \ (27,91,92)D (1B, 5B, 5C)H

Specifies the basic amount of line feeding.

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 (n1=4 n2=0 m1=0 m2=0 m3=0,104,180,216 m4=0,1,180,216)

m1 m2 m1 m2 m1 m2 n1 + n2 x 256

indicates the number of the next data.

m3 m4 m3 m4 m3 m4 When m3=0 and m4=216 or m3=216 and m4=0 ,

the basic line

feed pitch is 1/216 inch.

When m3=0 and m4=180 or m3=180 and m4=0

, the basic line

feed pitch is 1/180 inch.

When m3=104 and m4=1, the basic line feed pitch is 1/360 inch.

The basic line feed pitch is 1/216 inch (when not in the AGM

mode) or 1/180 inch (in the AGM mode) by default.

ESC [ d (27,91,100)D (1B, 5B, 64)H

Selects character quality.

(n1=1 n2=0)

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 + n2 x 256

indicates the number of the next data.

n3 n3 n3 n3 = 0

: Not changed.

n3 =(01)H - (7F)H

Draft

n3 =(80)H - (BF)H

LQ

n3 =(C0)H -(FE)H

Emphasized LQ

n3 =(FF)H

LQ

Valid when #35 QUALITY LOCK is set to NO in the

EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

ESC [ g (27,91,103)D (1B, 5B, 67)H

Graphic mode

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2 n1+n2

×

256

specifies (graphic data + 1).

m m m {0 ≤n1 ≤255}{0 ≤n2 ≤255} {m = 0, 1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 11, 12, 16}

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2 m

indicates the graphic mode (density) as shown below.

••• dk ••• dk ••• dk

●

IBM Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-16

m = 0 8 pin 60 dpi

1 8 120

2 8 120 (*)

3 8 240 (*)

824 60

9 24 120

11 24 180

12 24 360 (*)

16 48 360 (*)

In a graphic mode marked with an asterisk

(*)

horizontally adjacent dots cannot be printed.

— 8. Software commands —

●

IBM Software commands

ESC \ (27)D (92)D (1B)H (5C)H

All-character set

{0 ≤n1 ≤255}{0 ≤n2 ≤255}

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Prints n1 + n2 × 256 characters in the all-character character set.

d1 d2 d1 d2 d1 d2

•••dk •••dk •••dk

ESC ] (27)D (93)D (1B)H (5D)H

Reverse line feeding.

This command does not execute a carriage return even when an

automatic carriage return is specified.

ESC ^ (27)D (94)D (1B)H (5E)H

All-character set for a single character.

{0 ≤n ≤255}

n n n

Prints only one character following

ESC ^

in the all-character

character set.

ESC _(27)D (95)D (1B)H (5F)H

Specifies or cancels the upper line.

n n n n = 1

: Specifies the upper line.

n = 0

: Cancels the upper line.

ESC d (27)D (100)D (1B)H (64)H

Specifies the relative printing position.

{0 ≤n1 ≤255}{0 ≤n2 ≤255}

n1 n2 n1 n2 n1 n2

Advances the printing position by

(n1+n2

×

256)/120

inch.

ESC j (27)D (106)D (1B)H (6A)H

Stops printing.

After printing, this command activates the buzzer and disables

printing.

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-17

BEL (07)D (07)H Activates the printer buzzer. (Available in PCL3+ or PCL3+D)

BS (08)D (08)H Backspace one character.

HT (09)D (09)H Moves to next horizontal tab.

LF (10)D (0A)H Linefeeds after printing.

FF (12)D (0C)H Form feeds after printing.

CR (13)D (0D)H Carriage return after printing.

SO (14)D (0E)H Selects secondary font.

SI (15)D (0F)H Selects prinmary font.

ESC (27)D (1B)H Designate start of escape sequence.

SP (32)D (20)H Space one character.

DEL (127)D (7F)H To print the ASCII DEL character.

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Horizontal positioning by column.

# C 67)D 43)H

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Horizontal positioning by 1/720”.

# H 72)D 48)H

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Sets left margin.

# L 76)D 4C)H

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Sets right margin.

# M 77)D 4D)H

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Vertical positioning by line (VMI).

# R 82)D 52)H

ESC & a (27,38,97,#, (1B,26,61,#, Vertical positioning by 1/720”.

# V 86)D 56)H

ESC & d (27,38,100,#, (1B,26,64,#, Designates underline mode.

# D 68)D 44)H

ESC & d (27,38,100,#, (1B,26,64,#, Cancels underline mode.

# @ 64)D 40)H

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Designates/Cancels the auto-cancellation of underline.

# E 69)D 45)H

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Designates/Cancels the auto-cancellation of secondary font.

# F 70)D 46)H If # is seto to “0”, current secondary font set changes

automatically to primary font when vertical position changes.

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Designates line termination.

# G 71)D 47)H # = 0 (30H) :CR=CR, LF=LF, FF=FF

# = 1 (31H) :CR=CR+LF, LF=LF, FF=FF

# = 2 (32H) :CR=CR, LF=LF+CR, FF=FF+CR

# = 3 (33H) :CR=CR+LF, LF=LF+CR, FF+CR

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Sets HMI (Horizontal motion index).

# H 72)D 48)H HMI is set by 1/120 inch.

HMI is defined as the distance where the print position moves

when the character code is input.

If # is 12, the input characters are printed in 10 cpi.

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Designates character pitch.

# S 83)D 53)H Character pitch is set.

# = 0 (30H) :Normal (10 cpi)

# = 1 (31H) :Double width (5 cpi)

# = 2 (32H) :Compressed (16.7 cpi)

# = 4 (34H) :12 cpi

●

HP Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-18 — 8. Software commands —

HP Software commands

●

HP Software commands

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Designates/Cancels automatic scroll mode.

# V 86)D 56)H # =0 (30H) :Designates automatic scroll mode.

# =1 (31H) :Cancels automatic scroll mode.

ESC & k (27,38,107,#, (1B,26,6B,#, Controls print direction. (Available in PCL3+ or PCL3+D)

# W 87)D 57)H Print direction is set as follows.

# = 0 (30H) :Unidirectional Print(left to right)

# = 1 (31H) :Bidirectional Print

# = 2 (32H) :Pre-directional Print

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Designates paper size.

# A 65)D 41)H Paper size is set as follows.

# = 0 (30H) :(Setting in the setup mode)

# = 2 (32H) :Letter

# = 3 (33H) :Legal

# = 26 (32H,36H) :A4

# = 81 (38H,31H) :ENVELOP Commercial-10

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets VMI (Vertical motion index).

# C 67)D 43)H VMI is set by 1/48 inch.

VMI is defined as the distance where the print position moves

when the LF code is input. If # is 8, the print position moves

in 6 LPI vertically.

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets the line spacing. VMI (Vertical motion index)

# D 68)D 44)H # = The number of LPI (lines per inch).

# = 8 (38H) :8 LPI

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets top margin by VMI. (where # = “1,2, ...)

# E 69)D 45)H When the top margin is set, the text length is set to the default.

In case of skip perforation ON

Text length = page length- top margin-1/2"

(Bottom margin is set to 1/2")

In case of skip perforation OFF

Text length = page length- top margin

(Bottom margin is set to 0")

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets text length.

# F 70)D 46)H Text length is set by line (VMI).

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets paper path.

# H 72)D 48)H The mode set as follows.

# = 0 (30H) :Ejects Paper.

# = 1 (31H) :Feeds paper with the CSF.

# = 2 (32H) :Feeds manually loaded paper.

# = -1 (2DH,31H) :Feeds paper with the front tractor.

# = -2 (2DH,32H) : Feeds paper with the rear tractor.

# = -10 (2DH,31H,30H) :Ejects paper to the front.

# = -11 (2DH,31H,31H) :Ejects paper to the top

# = -11 (2DH,31H,32H) :Ejects paper to the rear.

When the "NOT INSTALL" is selected in the" SETUP #60

OPTION," the CSF command is the same as #=0.

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-19

— 8. Software commands —

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Designates/Cancels skip perforation mode.

# L 76)D 4C)H Paper path is set as follows.

# = 0 (30H) :Cancels the skip perforation mode

# = 1 (31H) :Designates the skip perforation mode

ESC & l (27,38,108,#, (1B,26,6C,#, Sets page length by VMI.

# P 80)D 50)H

ESC & p (27,38,112,#, (1B,26,70,#, Receives data as text.

# X 88)D 58)H

ESC & s (27,38,115,#, (1B,26,73,#, Designates/Cancels wraparound.

# C 67)D 43)H # = 0 (30H) :Designates wraparound

# = 1 (31H) :Cancels wraparound

ESC ( (27,40,id)D (1B,28,id)H Assign font to the primary/secondary font set.

id

ESC ) (27,41,id)D (1B,29,id)H

id

✽: Avaliable in PCL3+ or PCL3+D mode

ESC ( # (27,40,#, (1B,28,#, Designates primary font.

@ 64)D 40)H # = 0 or 1 (30H or 31H) :

Copy the default primary symbol set to the current primary

symbol set.

# = 2 (32H) :

Copy the current primary symbol set to the current primary

symbol set.

# = 3 (33H) :

Copy the default primary font to the current primary font.

ESC ( 0 (27,40,48, (1B,28,30, Assigns the download font to the current primary/secondary

X 88)D 58)H font.

ESC ) 0 (27,41,48, (1B,29,30,

X 88)D 58)H

●

HP Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-20 — 8. Software commands —

id Font id Font

0 A MATH-SYMBOL ✽10U PC-8

0 B LINE-DRAW 11U PC-8, DENMARK/NORWAY

0 D ISO-60, NORWAY 1 12U PC-850

0 E ROMAN-EXTENSION 2 S ISO17,SPAIN 1

0 F ISO-25, FRANCE 2 ✽2 U ISO2, IRV

0 G GERMANY 2 ✽3 S ISO10, SWEDEN 2

0 I ISO15, ITALY 4 S ISO16, PORTUGAL 1

0 K ISO14, JIS, ASCI 5 S ISO84, PORTUGAL 2 ✽

0 L LINE-DRAW 6 S ISO85, SPAIN 2 ✽

0 M MATH 7 ✽8 U ROMAN-8

0 N ECMA 94, LATIN 1 (ISO-8859-1) 80U CODE PAGE 857 ✽

0 U ASCII 81U CODE PAGE 860 ✽

0 S ISO11, SWEDEN 1 82U CODE PAGE 863 ✽

1 D ISO61, NORWAY 2 83U CODE PAGE 865 ✽

1 E ISO4, UK 93U CODE PAGE 858 ✽

1 F ISO-69, FRANCE 1 94U CODE PAGE 861 ✽

1 G ISO-21, GERMANY 1 95U CODE PAGE BRASCII ✽

1 S SPAIN 3 ✽96U CODE PAGE ABICOMP ✽

1 U LEGAL ✽

●

HP Software commands

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Bold or emphasized.

# B 66)D 42)H Designates/Cancels bold or emphasized attributes as follows.

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 0 (30H) :Bold off/Emphasized off

# B 66)D 42)H # = 3 (33H) :Bold on /Emphasized off

# = 7 (37H) :Bold off/Emphasized on

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets character spacing. (# = Font pitch (CPI))

# H 72)D 48)H PCL mode = PCL3+, PCL3+D or PCL3

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 5 :5 cpi (0.01≤#<5.01)

# H 72)D 48)H # = 10 :10 cpi (5.01≤#<10.01)

# = 12 :12 cpi (10.01≤#<12.01)

PCL mode = PCL3+ or PCL3+D

# = 15 :15 cpi (12.01≤#<15.01)

# = 16.7 :16.7 cpi (15.01≤#<16.71)

# = 17.1 :17.1 cpi (16.71≤#<17.11)

# = 20 :20 cpi (17.11≤#<20.01)

# = 24 :24 cpi (20.01≤#)

PCL mode = PCL3

# = 16.7 :16.7 cpi (12.01≤#<16.71)

# = 20 :20 cpi (16.71 ≤#)

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Selects proportional or fixed character spacing.

# P 80)D 50)H # = 1 (31H) :Proportional pitch

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 0 (30H) :Fixed pitch

# P 80)D 50)H

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets print quality.

# Q 81)D 51)H # = 0 (30H) :Draft

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 2 (32H) :Letter Quality

# Q 81)D 51)H

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets italic character.

# S 83)D 53)H # = 0 (30H) :Cancels italic character

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 1 (31H) :Designates italic character

# S 83)D 53)H # = 2 (32H) :Designates italic character

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets typeface.

# T 84)D 54)H # = 0 (30H) LINE PRINTER DRAFT

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 3 (33H) COURIER

# T 84)D 54)H # = 4 (34H) SANSERIF

# = 5 (35H) ROMAN

# = 6 (36H) GOTHIC

# = 7 (37H) SCRIPT*

# = 8 (38H) PRESTIGE

# = 10 (31H,30H) ORATOR*

# = 11 (31H,31H) ORATOR-S*

# = 20 (32H,30H) OCR-A*

# = 21 (32H,31H) OCR-B*

*= Available in PCL3+ or PCL3+D

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-21

— 8. Software commands —

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets super/subscript.

# U 85)D 55)H # = + 1 (2BH,31H) :Designates superscript

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 0 (30H) :Cancels super/subscript

# U 85)D 55)H # = - 1 (2DH,31H) :Designates subscript

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Sets character point size.

# V 86)D 56)H # = 12 (31H,32H) :Standard font

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, # = 8 (38H) :Micro font

# V 86)D 56)H

ESC ( s (27,40,115,#, (1B,28,73,#, Download character descriptor and data.

# W 87)D 57)H The parameter # consists of 3 bytes of the descriptor.

DATA DATA DATA <Attribute data format>

1 st 8 (Attribute format)

2 nd 0 (Continuation)

3 rd 1 (Acknowledge for the attribute data)

Dot pattern data stream is translated as follows:

ESC ) # (27,41,#, (1B,29,#, Designates secondary font.

@ 64)D 40)H # = 0(30H) :

Copy the default secondary symbol set to the current secondary

symbol set.

# = 1(31H) :

Copy the default primary symbol set to the current secondary

symbol set.

# = 2(32H) :

Copy the current primary symbol set to the current secondary

symbol set.

# = 3(33H) :

Copy the default secondary font to the current secondary font.

●

HP Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-22 — 8. Software commands —

1/180 dpi

1/180 dpi

1/360 dpi 1/120 dpi

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

A

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

D

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

F

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

G

36 dots

•••••••

AAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB CCCCCCCC

1 byte 1 byte 1 byte•••••••

Data stream

12 dots

24 dots

LQ DRAFT

●

HP Software commands

ESC ) s (27,41,115,#, (1B,29,73,#, Download font descriptor.

# W 87)D 57)H ESC ) s 0 W command resistors a blank LQ font.

DATA DATA DATA The format is as follows.

Symbol set : Byte 14-15 represent the symbol set # and ID for the

download character to be selected by ESC ( # id command.

Example:Roman-8

8U”

32 x 8 + 85 - 64 = 277 (01H,15H)

Point size(character height): Point size in decimal is registered.

Typeface:Parameter used in the typeface selection command is

registered.

LQ/DRAFT:Print Quality, LQ or Draft is registered by the

following definition;

0:DRAFT 1:LQ

ESC * b (27,42,98,#, (1B,2A,62,#, Selects format the graphic data compression.

# M 77)D 4D )H Available in PCL3+ or PCL3+D

Raster graphics data are registered.

# = 0 :compression off

# = 1 :mode 1

# = 2 :mode 2

# = 3 :mode

ESC * b (27,42,98,#, (1B,2A,62,#, Designates raster graphic data transmission.

# W 87)D 57)H

DATA DATA DATA

ESC * b (27,42,98,#, (1B,2A,62,#, Sets temporary graphics X-offset.

# X 88)D 58)H

ESC * b (27,42,98,#, (1B,2A,62,#, Sets temporary graphics Y-offset.

# Y 89)D 59)H

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-23

— 8. Software commands —

Byte 0-1 0 0

Byte 2-3 0 0

Byte 3-4 0 0

Byte 5-6 0 0

Byte 7-8 0 0

Byte 9-10 0 0

Byte 10-11 0 0

Byte 12-13 0 0

Byte 14-15 [ SYMBOL SET (2 BYTES)]

Byte 16-17 0 0

Byte 18-19 [ POINT SIZE (2 BYTES)]

Byte 20-21 0 0

Byte 22-23 0 0

Byte 24-25 0 [ TYPEFACE ]

Byte 26-27 0 0

Byte 28-29 [LQ/DRAFT] 0

ESC * c (27,42,99,#, (1B,2A,63,#, Set download character code.

# E 69)D 45)H

ESC * c (27,42,99,#, (1B,2A,63,#, Download font control

# F 70)D 46)H Controls download font as follows.

# = 0 (30H) :Delete all download font

# = 3 (33H) :Delete data of current download code.

# = 6 (36H) :Copy ROM font to download font.

ESC * p (27,42,112,#, (1B,2A,70,#, Sets Horizontal positioning by dot

# X 88)D 58)H # = 1/180" units :PCL3 or PCL3+

# = 1/360" units : PCL3+D

ESC * p (27,42,112,#,,(1B,2A,70,#, Sets Vertocal positioning by dot

# Y 89)D 59)H # = 1/180" units :PCL3 or PCL3+

# = 1/360" units : PCL3+D

ESC * r (27,42,114,#, (1B,2A,72,#, Sets start raster graphics printing

# A 65)D 41)H Raster graphics printing starts as follows

# = 0(30H) :Prints from the left most printable position

# = 1(31H) :Prints from the current position

ESC * r (27,42,114, (1B,2A,72, Sets terminates rastergraphics printing

B 66)D 42)H Raster graphics printing is terminated.

ESC * r (27,42,114, (1B,2A,72, Model number request (Serial I/F only)

K 75)D 4B)H Model number is requested.

The printer sends back the following answer when this data is

recognized. “2235A 2712CRLF”

ESC * r (27,42,114,#, (1B,2A,72,#, Designates raster graphics width.

# S 83)D 53)H Raster graphics width is defined by dot.

ESC * t (27,42,116,#, (1B,2A,74,#, Designates raster graphics resolution.

# R 82)D 52)H Raster graphics resolution is defined as follows.

When PCL3+ or PCL3+D is selected.

# = 6 , 0 (36H,30H) :60 dpi

# = 9 , 0 (39H,30H) :90 dpi

# = 1 , 8 , 0 (31H,38H,30H) :180 dpi

# = 3 , 6 , 0 (33H,36H,30H) :360 dpi

When PCL3 is selected.

# = 9 , 0 (39H,30H):90 dpi

# = 1 , 8 , 0 (31H,38H,30H) :180 dpi

ESC 9 (27)D (57)D (1B)H (39)H Clear left and right margin.

ESC = (27)D (61)D (1B)H (3D)H Half line feed - Half line feed is executed.

ESC ? (27,63,17)D (1B,3F,11)H Request I/O status (Serial I/O only)

DC1 Printer status is requested.

The printer sends back the following data to the host computer as

the printer status.

ESC E (27)D (69)D (1B)H (45)H Reset - The printer is initialized.

ESC Y (27)D (89)D (1B)H (59)H Designates display function - Display function is set on.

ESC Z (27)D (90)D (1B)H (5A)H Cancels display function - Display function is set off.

ESC z (27)D (122)D (1B)H (7A)H Self test - Self test print is executed for 1 page.

●

HP Software commands

Decimal Hex

Symbol Function

Code

8-24 — 8. Software commands —

MSB LSB

76543210

0000

1/0 1/0 1/0 1/0 Paper out or cover open

Printer busy

ONLINE (always)

I/O DATA error

:1

:1

:0

:1

9-1

— 9. Software setup functions —

1. Setup start command HD+DC1 (1B,7C,60,01,00,11)H

2. Setup end command HD+DC2 (1B,7C,60,01,00,12)H

3. Save disable command HD+DEL (1B,7C,60,01,00,7F)H

If this command is specified between the setup start command and

setup end command, the setting is not saved in the EEPROM

when the setup end terminates the software setup mode. It is

useful when the enlargement, reduction and other functions are

frequently used.

HD = 1BH,7CH,60H,m1,m2

9.

Software setup functions

The commands shown below are valid only when the software setup

function is activated in the setup mode. If the software setup function is

not activated in the setup mode, these commands are processed as normal

data.

Software setup is activated when the setup start command is issued and

deactivated when the setup end command is issued.

When the setup start command is accepted, any other software commands

and print data are ignored until the setup end command is accepted.

If the printer setting is frequently changed by setup commands, use the

save disable command so as not to exceed the allowable number of retries

to write in the EEPROM, which is approximately 100 thousand.

* Commands (1) to (19) are not automatically reset when the setup is

quit after changing the setting.

Command format

( 1B,7C,60, m1,m2, a1,•••,ak )H

SETUP COMMAND

a1 ~ ak:Optional data

DATA NUMBER

= m1 + 256 x m2 [a1 ~ ak]

HEADER(START)

HD + EM + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,19,n)H

(1) Paper path specification (PAPER PATH key)

(Setup Function #61)

n = 00H

Front loading and rear ejection of fanfold paper

01H

Front loading and front ejection of manually inserted paper

02H

CSF loading and front ejection (Optional)

10H

Front loading and upward ejection of fanfold paper

11H

Front loading and upward ejection of manually inserted paper

12H

Front loading and rear ejection of manually inserted paper

13H

CSF loading and upward ejection (Optional)

4H

Rear loading and front ejection of fanfold paper (Optional)

It is recommended that manual rear ejection not be used

together with another paper path application. Paper path

switching and the paper path switching mechanism are not

guaranteed if there is paper in the paper path switching

mechanism.

HD + F + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,46,n)H

(2) Paper format selection (PAPER FORM key)

n = 0: Selects format memory 1 (Memo 1)

n = 1: Selects format memory 2 (Memo 2)

n = 2: Selects format memory 3 (Memo 3)

n = 3: Selects format memory 4 (Memo 4)

n = 4: Selects format memory 5 (Memo 5)

n = 5: Selects format memory 6 (Memo 6)

This command selects the format memory to be used for

the currently selected paper path.

HD + x + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,78,n)H

(3) Character quality setting (QUALITY key)

n=0 LQ (Setup Function #10)

1 DRAFT

2LQ

3 NLQ

4 DRAFT

5 S. D.

6 S. S. D.

7 HQDR

This command specifies the character quality in the

currently selected format memory.

HD + +

(1B,7C,60,01,00,2B)H

(4) TOF position setting (TOF SET key)

This command is valid only when paper is loaded.

It specifies the TOF position of the loaded paper.

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-2 — 9. Software setup functions —

See pages 1-6, 1-7 and 3-42.

See pages 1-10 and 1-11.

See page 3-17.

See page 2-3.

9-3

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

HD + @

(1B,7C,60,01,00,40)H

(5) Reset (RESET key)

If the printer is reset without saving data, it enters the

condition set when power was turned on.

HD + G + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,47,n)H

(6) Printing pressure adjustment

(Setup Function #01)

n=0 Normal

1Normal

2Dark 1

3Dark 2

4Auto

This command specifies the printing pressure in the

currently selected format memory.

HD + c + m+n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,63,

(7) Head gap adjustment

(Setup Function #02)

m,n)H

When m = 0,3 Auto mode

n=5 Auto:+5click

::

n=1 Auto:+1click

n=0 Auto:0click

n=255 Auto:-1click

n=254 Auto:-2click

When m = 1,4 Fixed mode

n=25 Fix: +25 click

::

n=1 Fix:+1click

n=0 Fix:0click

n=255 Fix:-1click

n=254 Fix:-2click

::

n=251 Fix:-5click

This command specifies the paper pressure in the currently

selected format memory.

When m=0,1: Paper thickness adjustment is performed

after the printing head moves to the specified position.

When m = 3,4: Paper thickness adjustment is performed

when the command is processed and the printing head does

not move.

HD + p + n1 + n2

(1B,7C,60,03,00,70,

(8) TOF position adjustment

(Setup Function #03)

n1,n2)H 00 ≤n ≤63 n = n1 + 256 x n2

TOF: + n/60"

This command specifies the TOF position in the currently

selected format memory.

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

See page3-8.

See page 3-9.

See page 3-10.

HD + C + m + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,43,m,n)H

(9) Page length setting

(Setup Function #04)

m = 0

Fanfold paper

m = 1

Cut sheet paper

m = 0

n = 00H 11.0" n = 0AH 6.5"

01H 2.0" 0BH 7.0"

02H 2.5" 0CH 7.5"

03H 3.0" 0DH 8.0"

04H 3.5" 0EH 8.5"

05H 4.0" 0FH 9.0"

06H 4.5" 10H 9.5"

07H 5.0" 11H 10.0"

08H 5.5" 12H 10.5"

09H 6.0" 13H 11.0"

n = 14H 11.5" n = 1BH 15.0"

15H 12.0" 1CH 15.5"

16H 12.5" 1DH 16.0"

17H 13.0" 1EH 16.5"

18H 13.5"

19H 14.0" 20H 12.0"

1AH 14.5"

m = 1

n = 0H A4 PORT

2H A4 PORT n=12H A4 LAND

4H LETTER PORT 14H LETTER LAND

5H LEGAL PORT 15H LEGAL LAND

6H A3 PORT 16H A3 LAND

BH HALF LETTER PORT 1BH HALF LETTER LAND

CH EXECUTIVE PORT 1CH EXECUTIVE LAND

DH

GOVERMENT LETTER PORT

1DH GOVERNMENT LETTER PORT

EH GOVERMENT LEGAL PORT 1EH GOVERNMENT LEGAL PORT

20H A5 PORT 30H A5 LAND

21H LEDGER PORT

22H POST CARD PORT 32H POST CARD LAND

27H COM-10 PORT 37H COM-10 LAND

28H COM-6 PORT 38H COM-6 LAND

29H DL PORT 39H DL LAND

2AH C5 PORT 3AH C5 LAND

2BH F4 PORT 3BH F4 LAND

2CH MONARCH PORT 3CH MONARCH LAND

This command specifies the page length in the currently selected

format memory.

PORT : Portrait

LAND : Landscape

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-4 — 9. Software setup functions —

See page 3-11.

9-5

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

HD + W + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,57,n)H

(10) Width of fanfold paper

(Setup Function #05)

n=0 15

inches

110

inches

25

inches

4 12

inches

This command is valid when m = 0 or fanfold paper is

specified in the page length setting (9) above.

This command specifies the paper width in the currently

selected format memory.

HD + T + 00H + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,54,

(11) Top margin

(Setup Function #06)

00, n)H 00 ≤n ≤15

(In units of 6 lpi)

This command specifies the top margin in the currently

selected format memory.

HD + N + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,4E,n)H

(12) Bottom margin

(Setup Function #07)

00 ≤n ≤15

(In units of 6 lpi)

The perforation is not skipped when n=0. This command

specifies the bottom margin in the currently selected format

memory.

HD + Q + ml + mr

(1B,7C,60,03,00,51,

(13) Right and left margin

(Setup Function #08, #09)

ml,mr)H

00 ≤ml ≤63

Left margin

00 ≤mr ≤63

Right margin

(In units of 10 cpi)

This command specifies the right and left margins in the

currently selected format memory.

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

See page 3-12.

See page 3-13.

See page 3-14.

See pages 3-15 and 3-16.

HD + k + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,6B,n)H

(14) Character font selection

(Setup Function #11)

n = 00H ROMAN

01H ROMAN

02H SANS SERIF

03H COURIER

04H PRESTIGE

05H SCRIPT

06H OCR-B

07H OCR-A

08H LETTER GOTHIC

09H ORATOR

0AH ORATOR-S

This command specifies the font in the currently selected

format memory.

HD + P + n (1B,7C,60,02,00,50,n)H

(15) Character pitch selection

(Setup Function #12)

n=0 10 CPI

1 10 CPI

2 12 CPI

3 15 CPI

4 17.1 CPI

5 20 CPI

6 24 CPI

7 PROPORTIONAL

9 16.7 CPI

This command specifies the font in the currently selected

format memory.

HD + 3 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,33,n)H

(16) Line feed pitch setting

(Setup Function #13)

n=0 6 LPI

1 8 LPI

2 9 LPI

3 3 LPI

4 4 LPI

This command specifies the font in the currently selected

format memory.

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-6 — 9. Software setup functions —

See page 3-18.

See page 3-19.

See page 3-20.

9-7

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

HD + SI + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,0F,n)H

(17) Zoom in/out

(Setup Function #14)

n=00H 100% n=10H 200% n=1AH 1200%

01H 91%

02H 83% n=12H 400% n=1CH 1400%

03H 79%

04H 66% n=14H 600% n=1EH 1600%

0AH 116% n=16H 800%

0BH 120%

0CH 141% n=18H 1000%

This command specifies the zoom in/out in the currently

selected format memory.

HD + 4 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,34,n)H

(18) Paper fastener

(Setup Function #15)

n=0 NO

1 YES

This command specifies the paper fastener mode in the

currently selected format memory.

HD + ? + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,3F,n)H

(19) Perforation head-up

(Setup Function #16)

n=0 NO

1YES

This command specifies the perforation head-up mode in

the currently selected format memory.

HD + Z + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,5A,n)H

(20) Fanfold feed

(Setup Function #17)

n=0 FRICTION : NO

1 FRICTION : YES

This command specifies the fanfold feed in the currently

selected format memory.

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

See page 3-21.

See page 3-22.

See page 3-22.

See page 3-23.

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-8 — 9. Software setup functions —

HD + M + 01H + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,4D,

(21) Saving data in format memory

(Setup Function #19)

01,n)H n=0

Saves data in format memory 1.

1

Saves data in format memory 2.

2

Saves data in format memory 3.

3

Saves data in format memory 4.

4

Saves data in format memory 5.

5

Saves data in format memory 6.

This command saves data in the currently selected format

memory into specified memory.

HD + M + 02H + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,4D,

(22) Loading data from format memory

(Setup Function #20)

02,n)H n=0

Loads from format memory 1.

1

Loads from format memory 2.

2

Loads from format memory 3.

3

Loads from format memory 4.

4

Loads from format memory 5.

5

Loads from format memory 6.

This command loads data from the specified memory into

the currently selected format memory.

HD + E + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,45,n)H

(23) Emulation selection

(Setup Function #20)

n=00H EPSON

01H IBM

02 HP

See page 3-24.

See page 3-25.

See page 3-24.

9-9

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

HD + t + m + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,74,

(24) Character table selection

m,n)H (Setup Function #21, #22, #23, #51)

m = 00H EPSON

01H IBM

03H HP (PRIMARY FONT)

04H HP (SECONDARY FONT)

[m=00H: EPSON] [m=01H: IBM]

n = 0

Italic

n =0

Set 1

1

Code page

1

Set 2

2

Download

3

Code page

[m=03H: HP (PRIMARY FONT)]

n = 00

ROMAN-8 (8U)

01

CODE PG CODE PAGE

02

PC-8D/N PC-8

DENMARK/NORWAY(11U)

03

ECMA ECMA LATIN 1

(ISO 8859-1, ON)

04

LEGAL (HP SET, 1U)

05

SWEDEN1 (ISO-10, OS)

06

SWEDEN2 (ISO-11, 3S)

07

SPAIN (ISO-17, 2S)

08

FRANCE (ISO-69, 1F)

09

GERMAN (ISO-21, 1G)

0A

U.K. (ISO-4, 1E)

0B

PORTU PORTUGAL (ISO-16,4S)

0C

NORWAY1 (ISO-60, 4S)

0D

NORWAY2(ISO-61, 1D)

0E

IRV (ISO-2, 2U)

0F

ITALY (ISO-15, 0I)

10

FRANC2 FRACE 2 (ISO-25, OF)

11

GERMN2 GERMAN 2 (HP SET, OG)

12

SPAIN2 (ISO-85, 0G)

13

SPAIN3 (HP-SET, 1S)

14

JAPAN (ISO-14, 0K)

15

PORTU2 PORTUGAL (ISO-84, 5S)

[m=04H: HP (SECONDARY FONT)]

n = 00

LINE-DRAW (0L)

01

MATH-7 (0M)

See pages 3-25, 3-26 and 3-41.

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-10 — 9. Software setup functions —

HD + R + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,52,n)H

(25) National font selection (EPSON)

(Setup Function #24)

n = 0H

USA

8H

Japan

1H

France

9H

Norway

2H

Germany

AH

Denmark2

3H

U.K.

BH

Spain2

4H

Denmark

CH

Latin America

5H

Sweden

DH

Korea

6H

Italy

EH

Turkey

7H

Spain

FH

Legal

HD + i + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,69,n)H

(26) Code page selection

(Setup Function #25)

n = 0H 437

(USA)

1H 850

(Multilingual)

3H 860

(Portuguese)

4H 863

(Canadian French)

5H 865

(Nordic)

6H 857

(Turkish)

7H 858

8H 861

9H BRASCII

AH ABICOMP

20H ISO 8859-1

HD + Y + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,59,n)H

(27) Alternate graphics mode (AGM) (IBM)

(Setup Function #26)

n = 0

Invalid

1

Valid

HD + 5 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,35,n)H

(28) CR code function

(Setup Function #27)

n = 0 CR only

1 CR + LF

2 AUTOFEED

HD + 6 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,36,n)H

(29) LF code function

(Setup Function #28)

n = 0 LF only

1 CR + LF

HD + 1 + n (

1B,7C,60,02,00,31,n)H

(30) Accent character

(Setup Function #29)

n = 0

Simple (Resident Font)

1

Comp. (2 Pass Print)

See page 3-29.

See page 3-27.

See page 3-28.

See page 3-28.

See page 3-30.

See page 3-29.

Hexadecimal

9-11

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code Hexadecimal

HD + 0 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,30,n)H

(31) Zero font style

(Setup Function #30)

n = 0

No-slashed

"0"

1

Slashed

"0"

HD + w + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,77,n)H

(32) Horizontal tab interval

(Setup Function #31)

n =0 2

characters

14

characters

26

characters

38

characters

410

characters

512

characters

HD + > + a + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(33) Page length lock

(Setup Function #32)

61, n)H n =0

NO

1

YES

HD + > + b + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(34) Font lock

(Setup Function #33)

62, n)H n =0

NO

1

YES

HD + > + c + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(35) Character pitch lock

(Setup Function #34)

63, n)H n =0

NO

1

YES

HD + > + d + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(33) Character quality lock

(Setup Function #35)

64, n)H n =0

NO

1

YES

HD + > + f + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(36) Character table lock

(Setup Function #36)

66, n)H n =0

NO

1

YES

HD + ] + m + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,5D,

(37) Validity of bar code and enlarged character

6D, n)H (Setup Function #40)

n=0

Mode 2

1

Ignored

2

Mode 1

See page 3-30.

See page 3-31.

See page 3-31.

See page 3-32.

See page 3-32.

See page 3-33.

See page 3-33.

See page 3-36.

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-12 — 9. Software setup functions —

Hexadecimal

HD + ] + n + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,5D,

(38) Bar code type

(Setup Function #41)

6E,n)H

n=0H

INDSTRAL-2.5

7H

CODE128

1H

INTRLVD-25

8H

EAN-8

2H

MATRIX-25

9H

EAN-13

3H

CODABAR

AH

UPC-A

4H

CODE11

BH

UPC-E

5H

CODE39

CH

POSTNET

6H

CODE93

DH

ELENENT

HD + ] + x + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,5D,

(39) Bar code size

(Setup Function #42)

78,n)H

n= 0 1

1 1.5

22

3 2.5

HD + ] + X + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,5D,

(40) Enlarged character size

(Setup Function #43)

58,n)H

n= 0 1

12

24

38

4 12

516

624

732

HD + A + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,41,n)H

(41) Software setup

(Setup Function #44)

n=0 Valid

1 Ignored 1

2 Ignored 2

The setup command cannot change the ignored setting to

the valid setting. The command becomes valid after the setup

command mode is quit.

See page 3-37.

See page 3-39.

See page 3-39.

See page 3-40.

9-13

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code Hexadecimal

HD + < + e + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3D,

(42) PCL mode (HP)

(Setup Function #50)

65,n)H

n=0

PCL3+

1

PCL

2

PCL3+D

HD + o + m + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,6F,

(43) Setting option

(Setup Function #60)

m,n)H

m=0

: CSF

n =0

: No CSF

1

: CSF used (with no rear tractor)

m=0

: Rear tractor

n =0

: No rear tractor

1

: Rear tractor used (with no CSF)

The CSF and rear tractor cannot be used together.

m=2

: Skew detection

(Setup Function #64)

n =0

: NO (No detection)

1

: YES (Detection)

m=3

: Paper jam detection

(Setup Function #65)

n =0

: NO (No detection)

1

: YES (Detection)

HD + S + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,53,

(44) Automatic scrolling

(Setup Function #62)

n)H n=0

No scroll

1

0.5 second

2

1 second

3

5 seconds

4

10 seconds

5

15 seconds

HD + 8 + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,38,n)H

(45) Out-of-paper detection

(Setup Function #63)

n=0 No (No detection)

1 Yes (Detection)

HD + f + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,66,n)H

(46) Line feed speed

(Setup Function #66)

n=0 Normal

1 1/2

2 1/3

See page 3-40.

See page 3-41.

See page 3-43.

See page 3-44.

See page 3-42.

See page 3-43.

See page 3-44.

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

9-14 — 9. Software setup functions —

Code Hexadecimal

HD + I + p + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,49,

(47) Interface

(Setup Function #70)

70,n)H

n = 0

Parallel

1

Serial

2

Auto

This setting becomes valid after the setup command

mode is terminated.

HD + I + 0 + DC0 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(48) Printer select command

(Setup Function #71)

30,10,n)H

n = 0

Valid

1

Invalid

2

SLCT IN signal

This setting becomes valid after the setup command

mode is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + 0 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(49) Parity bit

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #72)

31,30,n)H

n = 0

None

1

Even

2

Odd

This setting becomes valid after the setup command

mode is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + 1 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(50) Data length

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #73)

31,31,n)H

n = 0

8 bits

1

7 bits

This setting becomes valid after the setup command

mode is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + 2 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(51) Stop bit

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #74)

31,32,n)H

n = 0

1 bit

1

2 bits

This setting becomes valid after the setup command

mode is terminated.

See page 3-46.

See page 3-47.

See page 3-47.

See page 3-48.

See page 3-48.

9-15

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code Hexadecimal

HD + I + 1 + 3 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(52) Protocol

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #75)

31,33,n)H

n = 0 DTR

1 X-ON/X-OFF 1

2 X-ON/X-OFF 2

3 ETX/ACK

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + 4 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(53) Baud rate

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #76)

31,34,n)H

n = 0 38400 BPS

1 19200 BPS

2 9600 BPS

3 4800 BPS

4 2400 BPS

5 1200 BPS

6 600 BPS

7 300 BPS

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + 5 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(54) Operation in case of serial error

(SERIAL I/F)

31,35,n)H (Setup Function #77)

n = 0

Print "❈"

1

Ignored

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + DC0 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(55) CTS signal

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #78)

31,10,n)H

n = 0

YES

(ENABLE)

1

NO

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

See page 3-49.

See page 3-49.

See page 3-50.

See page 3-50.

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-16 — 9. Software setup functions —

Hexadecimal

HD + I + 1 + DC1 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(56) CD signal

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #79)

31,11,n)H

n = 0

YES

(ENABLE)

1

NO

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 1 + DC2 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(57) DSR signal

(SERIAL I/F) (Setup Function #80)

31,12,n)H

n = 0

YES

(ENABLE)

1

NO

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + b + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,49,

(58) Input buffer size

(Setup Function #81)

62,n)H

n = 0 64K byte

1 8K byte

2 128 byte

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 0 + 0 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(59) BUSY/ACK signal timing

(PARALLEL I/F)

30,30,n)H (Setup Function #82)

n = 0

Type 3

1

Type 2

2

Type 1

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

HD + I + 0 + 1 + n

(1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(60) Input data latch timing

(PARALLEL I/F)

30,31,n)H (Setup Function #83)

n = 0

Type F.

1

Type R.

This setting becomes valid after the setup command mode

is terminated.

See page 3-51.

See page 3-51.

See page 3-52.

See page 3-53.

See page 3-53.

9-17

— 9. Software setup functions —

●

Command

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code Hexadecimal

HD + I + 0 + 3 + n (1B,7C,60,04,00,49,

(61) Error status signal output

(Setup Function #84)

30, 33,n)H

n = 0

YES

1

NO

HD + U + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,55,n)H

(62) Printing direction

(Setup Function #90)

n = 0

Pre-direction

1

Pre-direction

2

Uni-direction

3

Bi-direction

HD + z + n

(1B,7C,60,02,00,7A,n)H

(63) Display language on LCD

(Setup Function #91)

n = 0

ENGLISH

1

DEUTSCH

2

FRANCAIS

3

ESPANOL

4

ITALIANO

HD + > + g + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(64) Locking panel keys other than RESET and

67, n)H

ONLINE keys in the online state

(Setup Function #92)

n = 0

NO

1

YES

HD + > + e + n

(1B,7C,60,03,00,3E,

(65) RESET key lock in the online state

65, n)H (Setup Function #93)

n = 0

NO

1

YES

HD + SP + n1 + n2 (1B,7C,60,03,00,20,

(66) Print Head Position

n1, n2)H

n = n1

+

n2 x 256

Specifies the print head position in units of 1/360 inch

from the leftmost printable position.

The print head moves at the time that this command is

processed.

See page 3-54.

See page 3-55.

See page 3-55.

See page 3-56.

See page 3-56.

HD + q + n (1B,7C,60,02,00,71,n)H

(67) Paper Quality

(Setup Function #18)

n = 0

GOOD

1

NO GOOD

HD + 2 + n (1B,7C,60,02,00,32,n)H

(68) FF CODE AT TOF

(Setup Function #37)

n = 0

NO

1

YES

HD + # + n (1B,7C,60,02,00,23,n)H

(69) Graphic Quality

(Setup Function #38)

n = 0

MODE 0

1

MODE 1

2

MODE 2

HD + S + FF + n (1B,7C,60,03,00,53,

(70) Auto scroll position

(Setup Function #67)

FF,n)H

n = 0

ANY POS

1

TOF ONLT

HD + e + n (1B,7C,60,02,00,65,n)H

(71) Sleep mode

(Setup Function #94)

n = 0

YES

1

NO

●

Command

Hexadecimal

Control code Corresponding setup function

Code

9-18 — 9. Software setup functions —

See page 3-23.

See page 3-34.

See page 3-35.

See page 3-45.

See page 3-57.

10-1

— 10. Specifications —

Printing Method

Serial impact dot matrix

Print Head

24-pin movable (Parallel/Staggered orientation)

Emulation

EPSON LQ-2550 TM

IBM 2391 TM

Hewlett Packard Rugged Writer 480 TM (PCL3) TM

Bar code function

Enlarged character mode

Print Mode 10 cpi, 12 cpi, 15 cpi, 16.7 cpi, 17.1 cpi, 20 cpi, 24 cpi

Proportional printing

1/2 Proportional printing

Emphasized mode

Double striking mode

Double-width mode

Double-hight mode

Superscript & subscript mode

Italic mode

Download Character

EPSON

:

128 characters

IBM :

32 KB

HP

:

128 characters (PCL3), 255 characters (PCL3+, PCL3+D)

Character Table

EPSON

:

Italic set

Extended graphic set

IBM :

Code Page 437 (USA), 850 (Multilingual),

857 (Turkish), 858, 860 (Portuguese), 861 (Icelandic),

863 (Canadian French), 865 (Nordic), ISO-8859-1

BRASCII, ABICOMP

(Code Page can be used in the EPSON or HP mode.)

HP

:

ROMAN-8 (8U), PC-8 (10U), PC-850 (12U),

ECMA 94, LATIN 1(ISO-8859-1,0N), PC-8 DENMARK/NORWAY (11U),

LINE-DRAW (0L,0B), MATH 7(0A,0M), ROMAN-EXTENSION (0E),

SWEDEN 2 (ISO-10,3S), SWEDEN (ISO-11,0S),

UK (ISO-4,1E), FRANCE 2 (ISO-25,0F), FRANCE (ISO-69,1F),

GERMAN 2 (0G), GERMAN (ISO-21,1G),ITALY (ISO-15,0I),

SPAIN 3 (1S), SPAIN (ISO-17,2S), SPAIN 2 (ISO-85,6S)

PORTUGAL (ISO-16,4S), PORTUGAL (ISO-84,5S), IRV (ISO-2,2U),

JAPAN (ISO-14,0K), ASCII (ISO-6,0U), LEGAL (1U)

Graphic Printing

EPSON

:

11 types

IBM :

12 types

❈Horizontally adjacent dots can not be printed.

HP

:

4 raster graphic 60dpi, 90dpi, 180dpi, 360dpi

10.

Specifications

Printing specifications

Max. dots Dots/inch Vertical dots

816 60 8/24

1088 80 8

1224 90 8/24

1632 120 8/24

1632

❈

120 8

2448 180 24

3264

❈

240 8

4896

❈

360 24

4896

❈

360 48(IBM mode)

Normal 1/120 12

×

12 603

10cpi Dark 1 1/120 136 12

×

12 474

Dark 2 1/180 12

×

18 316

Normal 569

12cpi Dark 1 1/144 163 12

×

12 432

Dark 2 432

Normal 712

15cpi Dark 1 1/180 204 12

×

12 473

Dark 2 473

Normal 526

Draft 16.7cpi Dark 1 1/240 227 12

×

12(+2.4) 399

Dark 2 399

Normal 540

17cpi Dark 1 1/240 233 12

×

12(+2) 411

Dark 2 411

Normal 631

20cpi Dark 1 1/240 272 12

×

12 481

Dark 2 481

Normal 577

24cpi Dark 1 1/360 326 12

×

12(+3) 379

Dark 2 379

Normal

Proportional Dark 1 1/180 ---- 12

×

N ----

(IBM,HP) Dark 2

Normal 723

Speed Draft 12cpi Dark 1 1/120 163 12

×

8(+2) 569

(SD) Dark 2 569

Normal 904

S.Speed Draft 15cpi Dark 1 1/120 204 12

×

8 712

(SSD) Dark 2 712

Normal 180

10cpi Dark 1 1/360 136 24

×

36 79

Dark 2 59

Normal 216

12cpi Dark 1 1/360 163 24

×

30 95

Dark 2 71

Letter Normal 270

Quality 15cpi Dark 1 1/360 204 24

×

24 118

(LQ) (EPSON) Dark 2 89

Normal 237

15cpi Dark 1 1/720 204 24

×

36(+12) 118

(IBM,HP) Dark 2 89

Normal 263

16.7cpi Dark 1 1/720 227 24

×

36(+7) 131

Dark 2 98

Normal 270

17cpi Dark 1 1/720 233 24

×

36(+6) 135

Dark 2 102

Print mode Mulipart Dot pitch Max. No. Character Structure Print speed

mode (inch) of Col. (V ×H) (cps)

10-2

●

Print mode specifications

— 10. Specifications —

Print mode specifications

( ): Additional space

10-3

— 10. Specifications —

●

Print mode specifications

Normal 315

20cpi Dark 1 1/720 272 24

×

30(+6) 158

Dark 2 119

Normal 380

24cpi Dark 1 1/720 326 24

×

24(+6) 189

(EPSON) Dark 2 142

Letter Normal 380

Quality 24cpi Dark 1 1/720 326 24

×

30 189

(LQ) (IBM,HP) Dark 2 142

Normal

Proportional

Dark 1 1/360 ---- 24 ×N ----

Dark 2

Normal

1/2 Prop.

Dark 1 1/720 ---- 24 ×N ----

(EPSON) Dark 2

Normal 240

10cpi Dark 1 1/360 136 24

×

36 158

Dark 2 158

Normal 289

12cpi Dark 1 1/360 163 24

×

30 189

Dark 2 189

Normal 361

15cpi Dark 1 1/360 204 16

×

24 237

(EPSON) Dark 2 237

Normal 237

15cpi Dark 1 1/720 204 24

×

36(+12) 158

(IBM,HP) Dark 2 158

Normal 263

NLQ 16,7cpi Dark 1 1/720 227 24

×

36(+7) 175

Dark 2 175

Normal 270

17cpi Dark 1 1/720 233 24

×

36(+6) 180

Dark 2 180

Normal 316

20cpi Dark 1 1/720 272 24

×

30(+6) 210

Dark 2 210

Normal 379

24cpi Dark 1 1/720 326 16

×

24(+6) 253

(EPSON) Dark 2 253

Normal 379

24cpi Dark 1 1/720 326 24

×

30 253

(IBM,HP) Dark 2 253

Normal

Proportional

Dark 1 1/360 ---- 24 ×N ----

Dark 2

Normal

1/2 Prop.

Dark 1 1/720 ---- 24 ×N ----

(EPSON) Dark 2

Print mode Mulipart Dot pitch Max. No. Character Structure Print speed

mode (inch) of Col. (V ×H) (cps)

( ): Additional space

Normal 360

10cpi Dark 1 1/120 136 24

×

36 240

Dark 2 240

Normal 289

12cpi Dark 1 1/144 163 24

×

12(+3) 216

Dark 2 216

Normal 361

15cpi Dark 1 1/180 204 24

×

12 237

Dark 2 237

Normal 263

HQDR 16.7cpi Dark 1 1/240 227 24

×

12(+2.3) 175

Dark 2 175

Normal 270

17cpi Dark 1 1/240 233 24

×

12(+2) 180

Dark 2 180

Normal 316

20cpi Dark 1 1/240 272 24

×

12 210

Dark 2 210

Normal 379

24cpi Dark 1 1/240 326 24

×

12(+3) 253

Dark 2 253

Normal

Proportional

Dark 1 1/144 ---- 24 ×N ----

(IBM,HP) Dark 2

Print mode Mulipart Dot pitch Max. No. Character structure Print speed

mode (inch) of Col. (V ×H) (cps)

10-4 — 10. Specifications —

●

Print mode specifications

( ): Additional space

Draft (10cpi) 132 206 LPM

LQ pica (10cpi) 132 76 LPM

NLQ (10cpi) 132 100 LPM

HQDR (10cpi) 132 135 LPM

S. D. (12cpi) 132 230 LPM

S. S. D. (15cpi) 132 270 LPM

10-5

— 10. Specifications —

60dpi 8/24 1/60inch Normal 31.6

Dark 1/2 24.0

80dpi 8 1/80inch Normal 24.0

Dark 1/2 18.0

90dpi 8/24 1/90inch Normal 18.0

Dark 1/2 15.8

120dpi 8/24 1/120inch Normal 18.0

Dark 1/2 10.5

120dpi 8/24 1/60inch Normal 36.0

(High speed 1,2)

Dark 1/2 24.0

120dpi 8 1/60inch Normal 31.6

Dark 1/2 24.0

180dpi 24 1/120inch Normal 18.0

Dark 1/2 10.5

180dpi 24 1/90inch Normal 24.0

(High speed 1) Dark 1/2 18.0

180dpi 24 1/60inch Normal 36.0

(High speed 2) Dark 1/2 24.0

240dpi 8 1/120inch Normal 18.0

Dark 1/2 10.5

240dpi 8 1/60inch Normal 36.0

(High speed 1,2)

Dark 1/2 24.0

360dpi 24 1/120inch Normal 18.0

Dark 1/2 10.5

360dpi 24 1/90inch Normal 24.0

(High speed 1) Dark 1/2 18.0

360dpi 24 1/60inch Normal 36.0

(High speed 2) Dark 1/2 24.0

●

specifications

Graphic type Horizontal Print Print speed

Density Pins dot pitch pitch inch/sec

Print Mode Columns Throughput

Throughput

Graphic printing specifications

NOTE : High speed 1, Quality : NLQ

High speed 2, Quality : HQDR, DRAFT, S. D., S. S. D.

10-6 — 10. Specifications —

Major functions

- High-speed printing

- Original plus 8 multipart forms printing

- Bar code printing

- Enlarged character printing

- Zooming IN/OUT

- Built-in skew sensor

- Automatic head adjustment

- Perforation cutting

- Paper parking

- Automatic perforation feeding (Automatic

scroll)

- Dual paper parking (with rear tractor)

- Setup memory setting

- Vertical alignment

- Energy Star

Interfaces

Parallel I/F (Centronics-compatible)

Bidirectional (IEEE1284, Nibble mode)

Serial I/F (RS-232C)

Protocol: DTR, X-ON/X-OFF 1,

X-ON/X-OFF 2, ETX/ACK

Baud rate: 38400, 19200, 9600, 4800,

2400, 1200, 600, 300 (bps)

Data buffer size: 512k byte maximum

●Power supply: AC 120V, 60Hz for USA and Canada

AC 230V, 50Hz for Europe and Asia

●Power consumption: 200 watts (Draft, LQ Self Test)

45 watts (Standby)

14 watts (Sleep mode)

●Optional parts power

source: 5 V, 1.5 A

●Operating temp.: 5 to 40°C [41 to 104°F]

●Operating humidity: 20 to 80% (No condensation)

●MTBF: 10,000 hours (at 25% duty; Not

applicable to print head.)

Dimensions: 630

×395 ×250 mm (W ×D × H)

[24.8 × 15.6 × 9.8 inch]

Weight: Approximately 24 kg [52.9 lbs.]

Available paper sizes

●Fanfold paper Paper width: 3 ~ 16 inches (Front tractor)

3~ 16.5 inches ( Rear tractor)

Paper thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.12 mm

Paper weight: 55 ~ 90 kg

17 ~ 28 lbs

64 ~ 105 g/m2

Paper quality: Wood-free paper

●Fanfold paper Number of sheets: 9 or less (Dark 2)

(multipart forms) Paper thickness: 0.12 ~ 0.59mm

Paper weight: 34 kg original +8

non-carbon equivalent

●Cut sheet paper Paper thickness: 0.08 ~ 0.12 mm

Paper weight: 55 ~ 90 kg

17 ~ 28 lbs

64 ~ 105 g/m2

Paper quality: Wood-free paper

Paper sizes: A3, A4, A5, Letter,

Half letter, Legal

Executive, Ledger,

Government legal,

Government letter, F4

Max. dimensions: 420×432 mm (W×L)

Min. dimensions: 76 ×76 mm (W×L)

●Post card

●Envelope Commercial-6,10

Monarch

DL,C5

Paper loading method

Fanfold paper: Push tractor

Tractor: Front tractor (standard)

Rear tractor (option)

Cut sheet paper Friction type feeding

Manual, CSF (option)

Multipart printing capability (LQ)

Standard mode: Original sheet + 5 sheets

Dark 1 mode: Original sheet + 7 sheets

Dark 2 mode: Original sheet + 8 sheets

These modes are selectable with #1 MULTIPART in

the SETUP MODE.

Line feed speed: 83 lines per second (6 lines/inch)

The line feed speed is selectable with #66 LF

SPEED in the EXTENDED SETUP MODE.

Line feed pitch: 1/360 inch minimum

Option: Rear Tractor

Option: Cut Sheet Feeder

●

specifications

Paper specifications

Other specifications

11.

Character set table

EPSON Italic table

EPSON Extended graphic table

— 11. Character set table — 11-1

H0 123456789ABCDEF

L(0) (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (96) (112) (128) (144) (160) (176) (192) (208) (224) (240)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

(15) (31) (47) (63) (79) (95) (111) (127) (143) (159) (175) (191) (207) (223) (239) (255)

H0 123456789ABCDEF

L(0) (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (96) (112) (128) (144) (160) (176) (192) (208) (224) (240)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

(15) (31) (47) (63) (79) (95) (111) (127) (143) (159) (175) (191) (207) (223) (239) (255)

Select this character table with ESC 6 and ESC t 1.

Select this character table with ESC t 0.

11-2 — 11. Character set table —

EPSON international font table

IBM character set table 1

H0 123456789ABCDEF

L(0) (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (96) (112) (128) (144) (160) (176) (192) (208) (224) (240)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

(15) (31) (47) (63) (79) (95) (111) (127) (143) (159) (175) (191) (207) (223) (239) (255)

Country HEX 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

U.S.A

FRANCE

GERMANY

U.K

DENMARK

SWEDEN

ITALY

SPAIN

JAPAN

NORWAY

DENMARK2

SPAIN2

LATIN AMERICA

KOREA

TURKEY

LEGAL

●Character set table

Select this character table with ESC R.

Select this character table with ESC 7.

●Character set table

— 11. Character set table — 11-3

IBM character set table 2

IBM all-character set table

H0 123456789ABCDEF

L(0) (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (96) (112) (128) (144) (160) (176) (192) (208) (224) (240)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

(15) (31) (47) (63) (79) (95) (111) (127) (143) (159) (175) (191) (207) (223) (239) (255)

Select this character table with ESC 6.

H0 123456789ABCDEF

L(0) (16) (32) (48) (64) (80) (96) (112) (128) (144) (160) (176) (192) (208) (224) (240)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

(15) (31) (47) (63) (79) (95) (111) (127) (143) (159) (175) (191) (207) (223) (239) (255)

11-4 — 11. Character set table —

Code 00H ~ 7FH (Common) Code page 437 (U.S.A.)

Code page 850 (Multilingual) Code page 857 (Turkish)

●Character set table

●Character set table

— 11. Character set table — 11-5

Code page 858 (Multilingual-Euro) Code page 860 (Portuguese)

Code page 861 (Icelandic) Code page 863 (Canadian French)

●Character set table

Code page 865 (Nordic) BRASCII

ABICOMP ISO-1 (ISO-8859-1)

11-6 — 11. Character set table —

— 11. Character set table — 11-7

HP mode

ROMAN-8 character set PC-8 (Danish / Norwegian) character set

LEGAL character set MATH 7 character set

●Character set table

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0123456789ABCDEF

L/H

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0123456789ABCDEF

L/H

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0123456789ABCDEF

L/H

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0123456789ABCDEF

L/H

The (00)H-(1F)H and (7F)H normally function as control code.

The character of (A0)H-(FF)H are, respectively, the same as those

of (20)H -(7F)H. The character of (A0)H-(FF)H are, respectively, the same as those

of (20)H -(7F)H.

●Character set table

11-8 — 11. Character set table —

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

A

B

C

D

E

F

0123456789ABCDEF

L/H

ASCII

FRANCE

FRANCE 2

GERMANY

GERMANY 2

U.K.

SWEDEN

SWEDEN 2

ITALY

SPAIN

SPAIN 2

SPAIN 3

JAPAN

NORWAY

NORWAY 2

PORTUGAL

PORTUGAL 2

IRV

23 24 40 5B 5C 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E

ISO ID

0U

1F

0F

1G

0G

1E

0S

3S

0I

2S

6S

1S

0K

0D

1D

4S

5S

2U

6

69

-

21

-

4

11

10

15

17

85

-

14

60

61

16

84

2

5D

•The character of (A0)H-(FF)H are, respectively, the same as those of (20)H -(7F)H.

•The characters with (20)H-(7F)H codes which are not shown in the International character

set above are the same as those of (20)H -(7F)H in ROMAN-8.

The character of (A0)H-(FF)H are, respectively, the same as those of (20)H -(7F)H.

Symbol

, , , Key............................3-2

A

Accent character.............................................3-30

ALT key ............................................................2-4

Alternate graphics mode (AGM) (IBM) ...........3-28

AUTO FEED signal ................................3-29, 7-3

Automatic scrolling .................................3-42, 4-4

Automatic serial/parallel ................................7-11

B

Bar code function

Code 128 subset transition rule .........5-11

Setting HRI print ...........................5-3, 5-9

Setting HRI font ...................................5-4

Printing density .................................... 5-5

Error processing ................................5-10

Element width ......................................5-3

Guard bar expansion ...........................5-5

Outline of the bar code function ..........5-1

Beginning of sequence ........................5-4

End of sequence .................................5-5

Data processing in the bar code

data sequence ................................5-7

Start and stop characters ....................5-6

Check character ..................................5-4

Bar code data sequence .....................5-5

Bar code rotational angle ....................5-6

Bar code height ..........................3-39, 5-3

Value input mode ................................5-6

Bar code type .............................3-37, 5-2

Buffer size .....................................................3-49

C

Cable Parallel interface ..................................7-1

Serial interface ....................................7-5

Caution ..............................................................iv

Character font ...............................................3-18

Character pitch .............................................3-19

Character table

Selecting character table (EPSON) ...3-26

Selecting character table (IBM) .........3-26

Selecting character table (HP) ..........3-25

Selecting code page ..........................3-28

Selecting national font (EPSON) .......3-27

Selecting secondary

character table (HP) ....................3-41

EPSON italic table ..............................11-1

EPSON extended graphic table .........11-1

EPSON international font table .........11-2

IBM character set table 1 .................11-2

IBM character set table 2 ..................11-3

IBM all-character set table .................11-3

Code page 437 ..................................11-4

Code page 850 ..................................11-4

Code page 857 ..................................11-4

Code page 858 ..................................11-5

Code page 860 ..................................11-4

Code page 861 ..................................11-6

Code page 863 ..................................11-5

Code page 865 ..................................11-5

Code page 858 ..................................11-5

ISO-8859-1 ........................................11-6

Code page BRASCII .........................11-6

Code page ABICOMP .......................11-6

ROMAN-8 ..........................................11-7

PC-8 (Danish/Norwegian) .................11-7

LEGAL ...............................................11-7

MATH 7 .............................................11-7

LINE DRAW ......................................11-8

Internatinal character set (ISO) .........11-8

Components and functions ........................viii, ix

Connecting the printer to the computer

Parallel interface ................................1-28

Serial interface ..................................1-29

Connector

Parallel ................................................7-1

Serial ...................................................7-5

Consumables ..................................................xii

Control panel ..............................................x, 2-1

CR code function ...........................................3-29

Cut sheet paper

Printing area ........................................1-9

Loading (Manual paper feeding) .......1-19

Printing using the CSF ......................1-22

D

Dark .......................................................i, 3-8, 4-2

Default setting .................................................3-6

Dimensions .......................................................vii

Disabled printing area

Top margin .........................................3-13

Bottom margin ....................................3-14

Left margin .........................................3-15

Right margin .......................................3-16

Dual paper packing .......................................1-16

E

EEPROM initialization ....................................4-5

EJECT/LOAD key ...........................................2-3

Enlarged character function

Character pitch ..................................5-23

HMI ....................................................5-21

VMI ...................................................5-22

Setting and canceling underscores ....5-26

INDEX

I

Improving printing capability ............................3-8

Installing ribbon cassette ................................1-2

Interface specifications

Parallel interface ..................................7-1

Serial interface ....................................7-5

K

Key shortcut functions ....................................4-9

L

LF code function ............................................3-29

Line feed pitch ...............................................3-20

Line feed speed .............................................3-44

LINE FEED/REVERSE LF key ........................2-4

Liquid crystal display ..............................1-10, 2-5

Loading date from format memory ...............3-24

Locking panel keys .......................................3-56

Locking reset key ..........................................3-56

M

Major functions .................................................... i

ManualPaper path ....................................1-5, 2-2

Selecting paper path ..................1-7, 3-42

Loading ..............................................1-19

Page length .......................................3-11

Max. No. of column .......................................10-2

MICRO LF/MICRO RLF key ...........................2-4

N

National font (EPSON) ..................................3-27

O

Operating humidity .......................................10-6

Operating temperature .................................10-6

Operational error messages

HEAD PROTECTION ......................... 6-2

PARK ERROR .....................................6-2

PAPER OUT ERROR ..........................6-3

PAPER JAM ERROR ..........................6-3

SKEW ERROR ....................................6-4

FRONT COVER OPEN .......................6-4

PAPER PATH ERROR..........................6-4

H. ADJ: FIX ERROR ...........................6-4

FLAP SWITCHING ERROR..................6-5

JAM. S LEVEL ERR .............................6-5

Options ..............................................................xii

Index

All-character set ...............................5-20

Form feeding .....................................5-18

Line feeding .......................................5-17

Rotational angle ................................5-24

Initializing the enlarged character

mode ...........................................5-18

Setting and canceling the enlarged

character mode ...........................5-22

Selecting an enlarged character font...5-20

Vertical printing position .................... 5-27

Horizontal printing position ................5-26

Setting and canceling enlarged

character smoothing ......................5-25

Cell offset ...........................................5-23

Cell expansion ...................................5-19

Height expansion ...............................5-21

Top offset ...........................................5-25

Back spacing ......................................5-17

Carriage returning ..............................5-18

Arrangement .......................................5-19

Character quality ................................5-24

Width expansion .................................5-26

Print samples ......................................5-28

Enlarging/Reducing print ..............................3-21

ENTER key .....................................................3-2

Executing test printing ....................................4-9

EXIT key .........................................................3-2

F

Factory default setting .....................................3-6

Fanfold paper

Paper path ....................................1-4, 2-2

Selecting paper path ...........1-6, 1-7, 3-42

Printing area ........................................1-8

Loading (Front tractor) .......................1-12

Loading (Rear tractor) .......................1-16

Page length .......................................3-11

Paper width .......................................3-12

Feeding perforation to the cutter

position .............................2-1, 4-3

FORM FEED key .............................................2-4

Functional error massages

CARRIAGE ERROR ............................6-1

FAN ERROR ...................................... 6-1

F.S. ERROR ........................................6-1

T.S. ERROR ........................................6-1

HAI. S. ERROR ...................................6-1

HA. S. ERROR ....................................6-2

HOME S. ERROR ...............................6-2

PLEASE POWER OFF ........................6-2

H

High-speed printing ...............................4-1, 10-2

Horizontal tab ...............................................3-31

P

Paper ..............................................................1-8

PAPER FORM key .........................................2-4

Paper jam detection ......................................3-44

PAPER PATH key ..........................................2-2

Parallel interface

AUTO FEED signal .............................7-3

ACK signal ..........................................7-4

BUSY signal ........................................7-4

ERROR signal .....................................7-4

INITIAL signal ......................................7-3

PE signal .............................................7-4

SELECT signal ....................................7-4

SELECT IN signal ...............................7-3

STROBE signal ...................................7-3

Data latch timing ................................3-53

Timing chart

Data input .....................................7-2

Initialization ..................................7-2

Power consumption ......................................10-6

Power cord ................................................vi, 1-1

Print head .....................................................viii, ix

Print mode specifications ...............................10-2

Printing area .............................................1-8, 1-9

Printing direction ............................................3-55

Print method ..................................................10-1

Printing out

Smudging paper ...................................6-6

Correcting vertical misalignment .......... 4-6

Printing speed ...............................................i, 4-1

Q

QUALITY key ..................................................2-3

R

RESET key .....................................................2-1

S

S.D. (Speed Draft) ........................................... 4-1

S.S.D. (Super Speed Draft) .............................4-1

Saving data in format memory ......................3-24

Selecting emulation .......................................3-25

Selecting interface .........................................3-46

Selecting paper path .......................................1-6

Setting option .................................................3-41

Setting serial interface

Parity bit ............................................3-47

Data length ........................................3-48

Stop bit ..............................................3-48

Protocol .............................................3-49

Baud rate ...........................................3-49

Serial error .........................................3-50

CTS signal ..................................3-50, 7-6

CIN ....................................3-52, 7-8, 7-11

CD signal .....................................7-7, 3-51

CRN .................................3-52, 7-8, 7-11

DSR signal .................................3-51, 7-6

DTR protocol ..............................3-49, 7-8

DTR signal ...........................................7-7

EXT/ACK protocol .....................3-49, 7-11

RXD signal ..........................................7-6

RTS signal ...........................................7-7

TXD signal ..........................................7-7

SRTS signal .......................................7-7

X-ON/X-OFF (I)/(II) protocol .......3-49, 7-9

Setting the printing start position .....................4-2

Setup modes

Outline .................................................3-1

Key type ..............................................3-2

Factory defaults setting .......................3-6

Setting example ...................................3-3

Saving data in format memory ..........3-24

Printing setup list ................................3-57

Enter/Exit ......................................3-1, 3-3

Loading data from format memory ....3-24

Skew detection .............................................3-43

Software command

EPSON ...............................................8-1

IBM ......................................................8-9

HP .....................................................8-18

Bar code .............................................5-2

Enlarged character function ..............5-16

Software setup ..............................................3-40

Command ............................................9-2

Setup functions ....................................9-1

Specifications ...............................................10-1

T

TEAR OFF key ...............................................2-1

Throughput ...............................................i, 10-5

TOF SET key ...................................................2-3

Top of form (TOF) adjustment ................3-10, 4-2

Troubleshooting ...............................................6-1

U

Unpacking ..................................................... v, vi

Using various types of paper .................1-10, 4-8

W

Weight ...........................................................10-6

Z

Zero font with slash .......................................3-30

Index

BEL (07)D (07)

Activates the printer buzzer.

BS (08)D (08)H

Moves the printing position left by one character

HT (09)D (09)H

Moves the printing position to the following horizontal tab

LF (10)D (0A)H

Single-line feed

VT (11)D (0B)H

Vertical tab

FF (12)D (0C)H

Form feed

CR (13)D (0D)H

Carriage return

SO (14)D (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line

SI (15)D (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode.

DC1 (17)D (11)H Printer select

DC2 (18)D (12)H

Cancels condensed mode.

DC3 (19)D (13)H

Printer deselect

DC4 (20)D (14)H

Cancels the double-width mode established by the SO command.

CAN (24)D (18)H

Cancel

DEL (127)D (7F)H

Deletes a character

ESC (27)D (1B)H

Escape

ESC SO (27)D(14)D (1B)H (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line

ESC SI (27)D(15)D (1B)H (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode.

ESC EM (27)D(25)D (1B)H (19)H

Specifies the paper path.

ESC SP (27)D(32)D (1B)H (20)H

Specifies the space between characters.

ESC ! (27)D(33)D (1B)H (21)H

Batch printing mode selection.

ESC # (27)D(35)D (1B)H (23)H

Cancels MSB control.

ESC $ (27)D(36)D (1B)H (24)H

Specifies the absolute printing position.

ESC % (27)D(37)D (1B)H (25)H

Specifies or cancels a downloaded character set

.

ESC & (27)D(38)D (1B)H (26)H

Defines a downloaded character.

ESC

✽

(27)D(42)D (1B)H (2A)H

Selects a graphic function.

ESC ( - (27,40,45)D (1B,28,2D)H

Specifies a line type.

ESC ( ^ (27,40,94)D (1B,28,5E)H

All character set

ESC ( t (27,40,116)D (1B,28,74)H

Specifies a character set.

ESC + (27)D(43)D (1B)H (2B)H

Specifies line feed pitch of n/360 inch.

ESC - (27)D(45)D (1B)H (2D)H

Specifies or cancels underscoring.

ESC / (27)D(47)D (1B)H (2F)H

Selects the vertical tab channel.

ESC 0 (27)D(48)D (1B)H (30)H

Specifies 1/8-inch line feed pitch.

ESC 2 (27)D(50)D (1B)H (32)H

Specifies 1/6-inch line feed pitch.

ESC 3 (27)D(51)D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies line feed pitch of n/180 inch.

ESC 4 (27)D(52)D (1B)H (34)H

Specifies the italic font.

ESC 5 (27)D(53)D (1B)H (35)H

Cancels the italic font.

ESC 6 (27)D(54)D (1B)H (36)H

Expands the character code area.

ESC 7 (27)D(55)D (1B)H (37)H

Cancels the expanded character code area.

ESC : (27)D(58)D (1B)H (3A)H

Copies the internal character set

.

ESC < (27)D(60)D (1B)H (3C)H

Returns to the home position.

ESC = (27)D(61)D (1B)H (3D)H

Specifies MSB 0.

ESC > (27)D(62)D (1B)H (3E)H

Specifies MSB 1.

ESC ? (27)D(63)D (1B)H (3F)H

Converts graphic modes.

ESC @ (27)D(64)D (1B)H (40)H

Initializes the printer.

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/60 inch.

ESC B (27)D(66)D (1B)H (42)H

Specifies the vertical tab position

.

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in number of lines.

ESC C NUL (27,67,00)D (1B,43,00)H

Specifies the page length in inches.

ESC D (27)D(68)D (1B)H (44)H

Specifies the horizontal tab position.

Software command list

EPSON command list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

ESC E (27)D(69)D (1B)H (45)H

Specifies emphasized printing.

ESC F (27)D(70)D (1B)H (46)H

Cancels emphasized printing

ESC G (27)D(71)D (1B)H (47)H

Specifies double-striking.

ESC H (27)D(72)D (1B)H (48)H

Cancels double-striking.

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/180 inch.

ESC K (27)D(75)D (1B)H (4B)H

Specifies the 8-dot single-density graphic mode.

ESC L (27)D(76)D (1B)H (4C)H

Specifies the 8-dot double-density graphic mode.

ESC M (27)D(77)D (1B)H (4D)H

Specifies 12 cpi (elite).

ESC N (27)D(78)D (1B)H (4E)H

Specifies the bottom margin.

ESC O (27)D(79)D (1B)H (4F)H

Cancels the bottom margin.

ESC P (27)D(80)D (1B)H (50)H

Specifies 10 cpi.

ESC Q (27)D(81)D (1B)H (51)H

Specifies the right margin

.

ESC R (27)D(82)D (1B)H (52)H

Selects a national character type.

ESC S (27)D(83)D (1B)H (53)H

Specifies superscript or subscript.

ESC T (27)D(84)D (1B)H (54)H

Cancels superscript or subscript.

ESC U (27)D(85)D (1B)H (55)H

Specifies or cancels uni-directional printing.

ESC W (27)D(87)D (1B)H (57)H

Specifies or cancels double-width printing.

ESC Y (27)D(89)D (1B)H (59)H Specifies the

8-dot double-speed, double-density graphic mode.

ESC Z (27)D(90)D (1B)H (5A)H Specifies the

8-dot quadruple-density graphic mode.

ESC \ (27)D(92)D (1B)H (5C)H

Specifies the relative printing position.

ESC a (27)D(97)D (1B)H (61)H

Selects the printing position adjustment.

ESC b (27)D(98)D (1B)H (62)H

Specifies the vertical tab position in each channel.

ESC g (27)D(103)D (1B)H (67)H

Selects 15 cpi.

ESC j (27)D(106)D (1B)H (6A)H

Executes reverse feeding at a pitch of n/180 inch

.

ESC k (27)D(107)D (1B)H (6B)H

Selects the font

.

ESC l (27)D(108)D (1B)H (6C)H

Specifies the left margin.

ESC p (27)D(112)D (1B)H (70)H

Specifies or cancels proportional printing.

ESC q (27)D(113)D (1B)H (71)H

Selects a special effect.

ESC t (27)D(116)D (1B)H (74)H

Selects a character code table.

ESC w (27)D(119)D (1B)H (77)H

Specifies or cancels double-length printing.

ESC x (27)D(120)D (1B)H (78)H

Selects character quality.

●

EPSON command list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

BEL (07)D (07)H

Activates the printer buzzer.

BS (08)D (08)H

Moves the printing position to the left by one character.

HT (09)D (09)H

Moves the printing position to the next horizontal tab.

LF (10)D (0A)H

Single-line feeding

VT (11)D (0B)H

Vertical tab

FF (12)D (0C)H

Form feed (Always moves the printing position to the left margin.)

CR (13)D (0D)H

Carriage return

SO (14)D (0E)H

Double-width printing on a single line

SI (15)D (0F)H

Specifies condensed mode.

DC1 (17)D (11)H

Printer select

DC2 (18)D (12)H

Cancels the condensed mode.

DC4 (20)D (14)H

Cancels the double-width mode set by the SO command.

CAN (24)D (18)H

Cancel

ESC (27)D (1B)H

Escape

ESC EM (27)D (25 )D (1B)H (19)H

Specifies the paper path.

ESC

✻

(27)D (42 )D (1B)H (2A)H

Selects a graphic function.

ESC —(27)D (45 )D (1B)H (2D)H

Specifies or cancels underscoring.

ESC 0 (27)D (48 )D (1B)H (30)H

Specifies line feeding at 1/8-inch pitch.

ESC 1 (27)D (49 )D (1B)H (31)H

Specifies line feeding at 7/72-inch pitch.

ESC 2 (27)D (50 )D (1B)H (32)H

Executes ESC A.

ESC 3 (27)D (51 )D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies n/216-inch line feed pitch.

ESC 3 (27)D (51 )D (1B)H (33)H

Specifies n/180-inch line feed pitch. (AGM)

ESC 4 (27)D(52)D (1B)H (34)H

Specifies TOF.

ESC 5 (27)D(53)D (1B)H (35)H

Specifies or cancels automatic line feeding

.

ESC 6 (27)D(54)D (1B)H (36)H

Specifies character set 2.

ESC 7 (27)D(55)D (1B)H (37)H

Specifies character set 1.

ESC : (27)D(58)D (1B,3A,00)H

Specifies 12 cpi.

ESC = (27)D(61)D (1B)H (3D)H

Specifies downloading.

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/72 inch.

ESC A (27)D(65)D (1B)H (41)H

Specifies the line feed pitch in units of n/60 inch. (AGM)

ESC B (27)D(66)D (1B)H (42)H

Specifies the vertical tabs.

ESC C (27)D(67)D (1B)H (43)H

Specifies the page length in number of lines.

ESC C NUL (27,67,00)D (1B,43,00)H

Specifies the page length in inches.

ESC D (27)D (68 )D (1B)H (44)H

Specifies the horizontal tabs.

ESC E (27)D(69)D (1B)H (45)H

Specifies emphasized printing.

ESC F (27)D(70)D (1B)H (46)H

Cancels emphasized printing.

ESC G (27)D(71)D (1B)H (47)H

Specifies double-striking.

ESC H (27)D(72)D (1B)H (48)H

Cancels double-striking.

ESC I (27)D(73)D (1B)H (49)H

Selects the font.

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/216 inches.

ESC J (27)D(74)D (1B)H (4A)H

Executes line feeding at a pitch of n/180 inches.

(AGM)

●

IBM command list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

IBM command list

ESC K (27)D(75)D (1B)H (4B)H

Specifies the 8-dot single-density graphic mode.

ESC L (27)D(76)D (1B)H (4C)H

Specifies the 8-dot double-density graphic mode.

ESC N (27)D(78)D (1B)H (4E)H

Specifies the bottom margin.

ESC O (27)D(79)D (1B)H (4F)H

Cancels the bottom margin.

ESC P (27)D(80)D (1B)H (50)H

Specifies or cancels proportional printing.

ESC Q (27)D(81)D (1B)H (51)H

Printer deselect

ESC R (27)D(82)D (1B)H (52)H

Initializes horizontal and vertical tab positions.

ESC S (27)D(83)D (1B)H (53)H

Specifies superscript or subscript.

ESC T (27)D(84)D (1B)H (54)H

Cancels superscript or subscript.

ESC U (27)D(85)D (1B)H (55)H

Specifies or cancels uni-directional printing.

ESC W (27)D(87)D (1B)H (57)H

Specifies or cancels double-width printing.

ESC X (27)D(88)D (1B)H (58)H

Specifies the right and left margins.

ESC Y (27)D(89)D (1B)H (59)H

Specifies the 8-dot double-speed double-density graphic mode.

ESC Z (27)D(90)D (1B)H (5A)H Specifies the

8-dot quadruple-density graphic mode.

ESC [ - (27,91,45)D (1B, 5B, 2D)H

Specifies the line type.

ESC [ @ (27,91,64)D (1B, 5B, 40)H

Specifies or cancels the double-width, double-height printing.

ESC [ K (27,91,75)D (1B, 5B, 4B)H

Software initial

ESC [ I (27,91,73)D (1B, 5B,49)H

Selects the font.

ESC [ T (27,91,84)D (1B, 5B, 54)H

Selects the code page.

ESC [ \ (27,91,92)D (1B, 5B, 5C)H

Specifies the basic amount of line feeding.

ESC [ d (27,91,100)D (1B, 5B, 64)H

Selects the character quality.

ESC [ g (27,91,103)D (1B, 5B, 67)H

Graphic mode

ESC \ (27)D (92)D (1B)H (5C)H

All-character set

ESC ] (27)D (93)D (1B)H (5D)H

Reverse line feeding

ESC ^ (27)D (94)D (1B)H (5E)H

All-character set for a single character

ESC _(27)D (95)D (1B)H (5F)H

Specifies or cancels the upper line.

ESC d (27, 100)D (1B)H (64)H

Specifies the relative printing position.

ESC j (27, 106)D (1B)H (6A)H

Stops printing.

●

IBM command list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

●

HPcommand list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

BEL (07)D (07)H Activates the printer buzzer. (PCL3+ or PCL3+D)

BS (08)D (08)H Backspace one character.

HT (09)D (09)H Moves to next horizontal tab.

LF (10)D (0A)H Linefeeds after printing.

FF (12)D (0C)H Form feeds after printing.

CR (13)D (0D)H Carriage return after printing.

SO (14)D (0E)H Selects secondary font.

SI (15)D (0F)H Selects prinmary font.

ESC (27)D (1B)H Designate start of escape sequence.

SP (32)D (20)H Space one character.

DEL (127)D (7F)H To print the ASCII DEL character.

ESC & a # C (27,38,97,#,67)D (1B,26,61,#,43)H Horizontal positioning by column.

ESC & a # H (27,38,97,#,72)D (1B,26,61,#,48)H Horizontal positioning by 1/720”.

ESC & a # L (27,38,97,#,76)D (1B,26,61,#,4C)H Sets left margin.

ESC & a # M (27,38,97,#,77)D (1B,26,61,#,4D)H Sets light margin.

ESC & a # R (27,38,97,#,82)D (1B,26,61,#,52)H Vertical positioning by line (VMI).

ESC & a # V (27,38,97,#,86)D (1B,26,61,#,56)H Vertical positioning by 1/720”.

ESC & d # D (27,38,100,#,68)D (1B,26,64,#,44)H Designates underline mode.

ESC & d # @ (27,38,100,#,64)D (1B,26,64,#,40)H Cancels underline mode.

ESC & k # E (27,38,107,#,69)D (1B,26,6B,#,45)H Designates/Cancels the auto-cancellation of

underline.

ESC & k # F (27,38,107,#,70)D (1B,26,6B,#,46)H Designates/Cancels the auto-cancellation of

secondary font.

ESC & k # G (27,38,107,#,71)D (1B,26,6B,#,47)H Designates line termination.

ESC & k # H (27,38,107,#,72)D (1B,26,6B,#,48)H Sets HMI (Horizontal motion index).

ESC & k # S (27,38,107,#,83)D (1B,26,6B,#,53)H Designates character pitch.

ESC & k # V (27,38,107,#,86)D (1B,26,6B,#,56)H Designates/Cancels automatic scroll mode.

ESC & k # W (27,38,107,#,87)D (1B,26,6B,#,57)H Controls print direction. (PCL3+ or PCL3+D)

ESC & l # A (27,38,108,#,65)D (1B,26,6C,#,41)H Designates paper size.

ESC & l # C (27,38,108,#,67)D (1B,26,6C,#,43)H Sets VMI (Vertical motion index).

ESC & l # D (27,38,108,#,68)D (1B,26,6C,#,44)H Sets the line spacing. VMI (Vertical motion index)

ESC & l # E (27,38,108,#,69)D (1B,26,6C,#,45)H Sets top margin by VMI.

ESC & l # F (27,38,108,#,70)D (1B,26,6C,#,46)H Sets text length.

ESC & l # H (27,38,108,#,72)D (1B,26,6C,#,48)H Sets paper path.

ESC & l # L (27,38,108,#,76)D (1B,26,6C,#,4C)H Designates/Cancels skip perforation mode.

ESC & l # P (27,38,108,#,80)D (1B,26,6C,#,50)H Sets page length by VMI.

ESC & p # X (27,38,112,#,88)D (1B,26,70,#,58)H Receives data as text.

ESC & s # C (27,38,115,#,67)D (1B,26,73,#,43)H Designates/Cancels wraparound.

ESC ( id (27,40,id)D (1B,28,id)H Assign font to the primary/secondary font set.

ESC ) id (27,41,id)D (1B,29,id)H

ESC ( # @ (27,40,#,64)D (1B,28,#,40)H Designates primary font.

ESC ( 0 X (27,40,48,88)D (1B,28,30,58)H Assigns the download font to the current

ESC ) 0 X (27,41,48,88)D (1B,29,30,58)H primary/secondary font.

ESC ( s # B (27,40,115,#,66)D (1B,28,73,#,42)H Bold or emphasized.

ESC ) s # B (27,41,115,#,66)D (1B,29,73,#,42)H

HP command list

●

HP command list

Decimal Hexadecimal

Symbol Function

Code

ESC ( s # H (27,40,115,#,72)D (1B,28,73,#,48)H Sets character spacing.

ESC ) s # H (27,41,115,#,72)D (1B,29,73,#,48)H

ESC ( s # P (27,40,115,#,80)D (1B,28,73,#,50)H Selects proportional or fixed character spacing.

ESC ) s # P (27,41,115,#,80)D (1B,29,73,#,50)H

ESC ( s # Q (27,40,115,#,81)D (1B,28,73,#,51)H Sets print quality.

ESC ) s # Q (27,41,115,#,81)D (1B,29,73,#,51)H

ESC ( s # S (27,40,115,#,83)D (1B,28,73,#,53)H Sets italic character.

ESC ) s # S (27,41,115,#,83)D (1B,29,73,#,53)H

ESC ( s # T (27,40,115,#,84)D (1B,28,73,#,54)H Sets typeface.

ESC ) s # T (27,41,115,#,84)D (1B,29,73,#,54)H

ESC ( s # U (27,40,115,#,85)D (1B,28,73,#,55)H Sets super/subscript.

ESC ) s # U (27,41,115,#,85)D (1B,29,73,#,55)H

ESC ( s # V (27,40,115,#,86)D (1B,28,73,#,56)H Sets character point size.

ESC ) s # V (27,41,115,#,86)D (1B,29,73,#,56)H

ESC ( s # W (27,40,115,#,87)D (1B,28,73,#,57)H Download character descriptor and data.

ESC ) # @ (27,41,#,64)D (1B,29,#,40)H Designates secondary font.

ESC ) s # W (27,41,115,#,87)D (1B,29,73,#,57)H Download font descriptor.

ESC * b # M (27,42,98,#,77)D (1B,2A,62,#,4D)H Selects format the graphic data compression.

ESC * b # W (27,42,98,#,87)D (1B,2A,62,#,57)H Designates raster graphic data transmission.

ESC * b # X (27,42,98,#,88)D (1B,2A,62,#,58)H Sets temporary graphics X-offset.

ESC * b # Y (27,42,98,#,89)D (1B,2A,62,#,59)H Sets temporary graphics Y-offset.

ESC * c # E (27,42,99,#,69)D (1B,2A,63,#,45)H Set download character code.

ESC * c # F (27,42,99,#,70)D (1B,2A,63,#,46)H Download font control.

ESC * p # X (27,42,112,#,88)D (1B,2A,70,#,58)H Sets Horizontal positioning by dot.

ESC * p # Y (27,42,112,#,89)D (1B,2A,70,#,59)H Sets Vertocal positioning by dot.

ESC * r # A (27,42,114,#,65)D (1B,2A,72,#,41)H Sets start raster graphics printing.

ESC * r B (27,42,114,66)D (1B,2A,72,42)H Sets terminates rastergraphics printing.

ESC * r K (27,42,114,75)D (1B,2A,72,4B)H Model number request (Serial I/F only).

ESC * r # S (27,42,114,#,83)D (1B,2A,72,#,53)H Designates raster graphics width.

ESC * t # R (27,42,116,#,82)D (1B,2A,74,#,52)H Designates raster graphics resolution.

ESC 9 (27)D (57)D (1B)H (39)H Clear left and right margin.

ESC = (27)D (61)D (1B)H (3D)H Half line feed.

ESC ? DC1 (27,63,17)D (1B,3F,11)H Request I/O status.

ESC E (27)D (69)D (1B)H (45)H Reset - The printer is initialized.

ESC Y (27)D (89)D (1B)H (59)H Designates display function.

ESC Z (27)D (90)D (1B)H (5A)H Cancels display function - Display function is

set off.

ESC z (27)D (122)D (1B)H (7A)H Self test - Self test print is executed for 1

page.

THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS B LIMITS FOR

RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARATUS AS SET OUT IN THE

RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATIONS OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF

COMMUNICATIONS.

LE PRÉSENT APPAREIL NUMÉRIQUE N'ÉMET PAS DE BRUITS

RADIOÉLECTRIQUES DÉPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX

APPAREILS NUMÉRIQUES DE CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LE RÈGLEMENT

SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOÉLECTRIQUE ÉDICTÉ PAR LE MINISTÈRE DES

COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA.

Maschinenlärminformationsverordnung 3. GSGV, 18.01.1991:

Der arbeitsplatzbezogene Schalldruckpegel beträgt 70 dB(A) oder weniger gemäß ISO 7779.

This unit complies with the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and the EMC Directive

89/336/EEC.

Dies Gerät entspricht den Bedingungen der Niederspannungs-Vorschrift 73/23/EEC und dem

EMVG nach 89/336/EEC.

PRINTER DIVISION

1-1-1, AKANEHAMA, NARASHINO-SHI, CHIBA 275-8558 JAPAN